Home

Paradyne COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems 3810 User's Manual

1. Table 12 5 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords DTE Password Only Index Password Type Assigned to 1001 winter DTE_Entry User A 1002 summer DTE_Entry User B 1003 spring DTE_Entry User C 1004 fall DTE_Entry User D 1005 z DTE_Entry User E 1006 3g8sX4 DTE Entry User F Table 12 6 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side and DTE Side Passwords VF and DTE Passwords Index Password Type Assigned to 121 1 VF Entry Denver office 131 12 VF plus DTE Chicago office 141 1212 VF plus DTE Dallas office 151 953246 VF plus DTE Miami office modem 1 152 46958373 VF_plus_DTE Miami office modem 2 161 32562682 VF_Entry Atlanta office 1131 winter DTE_Entry User C Chicago office 1141 summer DTE Entry User A Dallas office 1142 spring DTE_Entry User B Dallas office 1151 fall DTE_Entry User D Miami office 1152 z DTE Entry User E Miami office 1153 398sX4 DTE Entry User F Miami office Users in the Denver and Atlanta offices are connected to the DTE after entering a valid VF password and the modems train and negotiate error control without entering a DTE password Users at the Chicago Dallas and Miami offices are required to enter a DTE password after the VF password is entered via the AT dial command 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 13 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 12 7 is an example of a security database table that uses pa
2. Activ Operating Customer Customer2 Factory A H I ctive Saved Async_Dial Sync_Leased Cellular Sync_Dial UNIX Dial PSTN Choose Mode Cellular Mobile Answer Originate Choose Function Edit Save l Active Saved Customer Customer2 l DTE_Interface Line_Dialer Leased_Line Tests Security DTE_Dialer Dial_Line V42 MNP Buffer Misc 494 13088 02 9 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch The Configure branch consists of the following three levels e Ld EditArea frm Allows the selection of the Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory configuration areas e Choose Function Allows you to make changes Edit to existing configuration options or write Save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration area e Edit Strap Group Contains the eight software configuration option groups that determine how the modem operates Editing and Saving a Configuration Option The following example shows how to change the Remote Access Password using the DCP If you ever intend to access another 3800 Series modem via the Remote branch of the Top Level menu the Remote Access Password must be the same for both modems By following these procedures you learn how to load a factory preset configuration area in this case Async Dial how to edit a configuration option Remote Access Password and how to save changes to a con
3. When you hear this tone immediately select TIk Data This starts the handshaking sequence between your modem and the remote modem Online 19 2 ZN Call Setup ness lt ri re rs ce If this is successful the modems are in Data mode and Online appears on the LCD Manual Dialing when the Remote Modem Is Configured for Manual Answer If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Manual Answer perform the following procedure Once the remote telephone is answered by the remote user you must both decide when to place the modems into Data mode You must both select TIk Data at approximately the same time to begin the handshaking sequence If the handshake is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD NOTE If the remote modem is not a 3800 Series modem then the remote user must consult that modem s operator s manual to perform a similar operation Once the modems are online status messages listed in Table 4 4 in Chapter 4 appear on the Top Level display It is not necessary to specify an originating or answering modem when dialing via the DCP because the answering modem remembers that it received a ring voltage and will automatically default to Answer mode Placing Modems into Talk Mode Once Modems Are Online If you want to communicate to a remote user via the telephone once a dial connection h
4. Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Leased Line Mil Leased Mode LeasedLine Rate 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis V32bis Autorate Leased TX Level 1800HzTrainTone BdLn Auto Orig Rate Auto Orig Auto Redial AutoDialS tandby CarrierOnLevel FallF wdDelay V42 MNP Butfer ii Err Contrl Mode Tests MI V42 MNPorBfr DTE LL CT141 V42 MNPorDsc Test Timeout MNP or Buffr Rcv Remote Loop MNP or Disc V54Address BufferMode V54 Device Type DirectMode LAPM or Disc LAPM or Buff V42bis Compress MNP5 Compress EC Negotiat Bfr EC Fallbck Char Flw Cntl of DTE Flw Cntl of Mdm XON XOFF Psthru Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Break Buffr Ctl Send Break Cntl Tx Buff Disc Delay Rx Buff Disc Delay Max Frame Size Cellular Enhance DTE RL CT140 Misc MI Security X StrapsWhenDisc EntryWait Time Speaker Control VF Prompt Type Speaker Volume Access frm Remt amp DTE PW Tries DTE PW TermChar RemAccssP asswrd DTE PW BkSpChar Dirl Callback Get User ID NetMngmtAddress NMS Reporting NMS Call Msgs Answer Secur NMS DTR Alarm Originate Secur NetworkP osition RJ 11 Cellular Adapt Does not appear if configured for Synchronous mode Only appears if Sync Leased factory template is selected Only appears if optional dial access security feature is installed 495 14436b 01 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 A 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems from previ
5. Select Reset Reset appears before the modem performs the power up diagnostic test sequence AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Reset is Z 10 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Control Branch Make Busy Remove Make Busy The Make Busy function forces the modem off hook so it cannot answer a call This is often used with PBX systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or hunt groups WARNING To not violate FCC and DOC regulations this function must only be used behind a user s PBX To access Make Busy from the Control branch make the following selections pn Control A Reset Make Busy A lt r be F Press the key until Make Busy appears Select Make_Busy Make Busy A Command Complete A lt a re rs gt The modem is now in a forced busy condition Command Complete appears on the LCD To remove the modem from Make Busy mode press the Z key once and the key until Remove Make Busy appears Control A RemoveMakeBusy c3 Gc L 6E 5 we Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy The message Command Complete appears on the LCD AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Remove Make Busy is H or HO The AT command for Make Busy is H1 Service Line Disconnect Service Line The Service Line function allows you to switch a specific Model 38
6. DTE Dialer Table 9 2 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the default setting the default value if the modem is just DTE to modem protocol for call establishment and being installed shown following the colon on the first control line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 2 1 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options DTE Dialer Type AT Nxt AT Disable V25bis Async V25bis Bsync V25bis HDLC DTR Dirs RS366A AT amp T_Exclusv Data Terminal Equipment Dialer Type Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE AT Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands and dialing when used in an asynchronous application This is the only valid setting for leased line applications NOTE The modem will not respond to AT commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set for AT Disable Disables any type of DTE dialing method Dialing can only be performed using the DCP s Dial command or attached telephone V 25bis Async Selects V 25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem The character length must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit V 25bis Bisync Selects V 25bis Bisync as the
7. A screw lock tab installed over a circuit card s latch release tab to prevent the unit from being removed without a tool It is used on SDUs modems and filler panels A fax modem standard Under Class 1 computer software handles most of the protocol compression and conversion tasks A fax modem standard Under Class 2 the modem handles most of the protocol compression and conversion tasks as well as modulation leaving the computer free for other work Contains the command s instructing the modem to perform a function Command lines begin with the AT prefix unless disabled and are executed when you press the Return key One of two general modem operating modes When in Command mode the modem accepts commands instead of transmitting or receiving data One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings Configuration areas include Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory Modem software that sets specific operating parameters for the modem Sometimes referred to as straps 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Glossary 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Configure connector CSA CTS Customer 1 Customer 2 data carrier data compression Data mode DB 25 connector dBm DCE DCP demodulation dial command modifiers dial line dial network Dial Standby dial string Top Level menu branch that contains all the modem s configuration options
8. DTE DIALER DTE Dialer Type AT Disable Disable AT Escape Character 043 ASCII N A N A Escape Guard Time 1sec N A N A Break Forces Escape Disable N A N A Command Character Echo Enable N A N A Carriage Return Character 013 ASCII N A N A Backspace Character 008 ASCII N A N A Linefeed Character 010 ASCII N A N A Result Codes Enable N A N A Enable In Originate Extended Result Codes Enable N A N A Result Codes Format Words N A N A AT Command Mode Normal N A N A V 25bis Coding N A N A N A V 25bis Idle Fill N A N A N A V 25bis New Line Character N A N A N A LINE DIALER Auto Answer Ring Count 1 1 1 Dialer Type Tone Tone Tone Dial Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Blind Dial Pause N A N A N A Busy Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Pause Time 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec No Answer Timeout 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec Fast Disconnect Disable Disable Disable Line Current Disconnect Enable Enable Enable 8 msec 8 msec 8 msec Long Space Disconnect Enable Disable Enable No Carrier Disconnect 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec No Data Disconnect 60 min 60 min 60 min Auto Make Busy Disable Disable Disable 3811 only Make Busy via DTR Disable Disable Disable MI MIC Dialing Disable Disable Disable UNIX Dial default setting only November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Default Configuration Options Table G 1 3 of 4 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Option Async Dial and UNIX Dial Default Settings Sync Dial Default Settin
9. CTS Control Forced_On Nxt Forced On Stndrd RS232 WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Clear to Send Control CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE NOTE When CTS flow control or CTS RTS flow control is enabled CTS will turn ON and Off regardless of the setting of CTS Control Forced On CTS is forced ON at all times Use this selection for most asynchronous applications Standard RS232 In Synchronous mode forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA 232 D operation The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS CTS Delay configuration option Use this setting for most synchronous applications In AT Command mode CTS goes low just prior to DSR going active and goes high when the modem enters Data mode This operation prevents losing data in applications which begin transmitting as soon as DSR and CTS are both active Wink When Disconnect CTS is normally forced ON but is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Use this for most UNIX applications Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON CTS turns ON When DTR turns Off CTS turns Off For Async Dial Forced On is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased Stndrd RS232 is the factory default For UNIX Dial WinkWhenDisc is the factory default AT command for Forced On is DO AT command for Standard RS232 is D1 AT command for Wink When D
10. On leased lines with dial backup Auto Redial works in conjunction with the Bad Lines Auto Originate and Rate Auto Originate options Register has the following values S35 0 Use Directory Location 1 S35 21 Use Directory Locations 1 2 S35 2 Use Directory Locations 1 3 S35 3 Use Directory Locations 1 4 S35 9 Use Directory Locations 1 10 NOTE The modem must be in Originate mode to perform an automatic dial backup S36 Rate Auto Originate Configure VEditW eased Line Initiates a dial backup call using the phone number in directory location 1 when the leased line rate of the modem falls back to or below a certain speed Register has the following values S36 0 Disable S36 1 On fallback to 4800 36 2 On fallback to 7200 36 3 On fallback to 9600 36 4 On fallback to 12 000 36 5 On fallback to 14 400 36 6 On fallback to 16 800 NOTE Rate Auto Originate is valid only when V 32bis Autorate is enabled S76 0 S37 Auto Redial DTR ConfigureEditLine Dialer Auto Redial allows repeated automatic dial backup attempts by DTR Auto Redial specifying the range of Directory Locations that can be tried A redial attempt is made in response to a bad phone number a busy signal no answer or no quiet answer The modem must be in Originate mode When DTE Dialer Type is DTR Dirs Auto Redial works in conjunction with the DTR Cont Repeat S38 configuration option Register has the following values 37 0 Use Directory Location 1 S37 1
11. An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection Canadian Standards Association Clear to Send A signal indicating that the modem is ready for the DTE to transmit data A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains information to be transmitted The elimination of empty fields redundancies and gaps in order to reduce storage capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted Anything that is eliminated is restored after the data is received One of two general modem operating modes When in Data mode the modem transmits and receives data instead of accepting commands A 25 pin connector that is used to connect a cable which enables communications between two devices A decibel referenced to one milliwatt This unit measures relative signal power The equipment Data Communications Equipment or Data Circuit Terminating Equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection This equipment also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the telephone line A modem is a DCE Diagnostic Control Panel The face of the modem that continuously provides status information about the modem s operatio
12. COMSPHERE 3800 SERIES MODEMS MODELS 3810 3811 AND 3820 USER S GUIDE Document No 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Models 3810 3811 and 3820 User s Guide 3810 A2 GB30 20 3rd Edition November 1996 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release For the 3800 Series standalone modems the Universal Service Order Code USOC for Permissive mode is RJ11C and for Programmable mode is RJ41S or RJ45S The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA11 for RJ11C and CA41A and CA45A for RJA1S and RJASS respectively For 3800 Series carrier mounted modems the USOC for Permissive mode is RJ21X and for Programmable mode is RJ27X The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA21A for RJ21X and CA27A for RJ27X Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com e Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mention
13. COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Status Branch To access Status from the Top Level menu make the following selections Idle 19 2 A EM m3 A Gm L 8 DJ 0m Press the key until Status appears Select Status VF VF displays the condition of the dial or leased line connection To access VF from the Status branch make the following selection Status 3 E ma A GSEs Select VE Status VF A m ii A a fe re fre The modem s signal quality is displayed on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll and view the receive signal level signal to noise ratio near end echo far end echo delay and echo frequency offset SigQual Signal Quality indicates the condition of the VF line Possible values are Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal These values only appear for V 32bis and V 32 modulations RevLev Receive Signal Level indicates in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm the actual strength of the incoming signal Sig Noise Signal to Noise Ratio indicates in decibels the receive signal strength relative to noise on the line Near End Echo displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the local line termination This value only appears for V 32bis and V 32 modulations FarEc
14. Configure Edit DTE Dialer S3 Carriage Return Character Register determines ASCII value used as the carriage return Return key This character is used to end command lines and result codes Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character Factory setting is 13 carriage return key NOTE The amp W command used to save this change must be on a separate line This ensures both that the change is intentional and that the DTE can enter the new character Configure Edit DTE Dialer S4 Line Feed Character Register determines ASCII value used as the line feed character Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the line feed character Factory setting is 10 ASCII carriage return or line feed Configure Edit DTE Dialer S5 Backspace Character Register determines ASCII value used as the backspace Backspace key This character moves the cursor to the left and erases the previous character Enter a value from 0 to 127 Factory setting is 08 backspace key Configure Edit DTE Dialer S6 Blind Dial Pause Register determines how long in seconds the modem waits after going off hook before dialing a telephone number if using result code XO X1 or X3 Enter a value from 2 to 255 seconds Factory setting is 2 seconds Configure WEditLine Dialer S7 No Answer Timeout Register determines how long in seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call when no answer tone is rece
15. To prevent losing data in 115 200 bps applications a 16650 UART on the PC s serial port is required as well as a communications package which can take advantage of its 16 byte buffer In addition a 386 25 MHz or faster PC is required and the RS 232 cable must be 6 feet or less to minimize capacitance NOTE This configuration option is ignored in Async Direct mode and synchronous mode since the DTE rate always equals the VF rate The factory default is 19200 bps AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate Data Bits 8 Nxt 8 7 9Q DirectMde 6 DirectMde Number of Data Bits Determines if the data length is composed of 6 7 8 or 9 data bits This data length excludes start parity and stop bits 8 Sets data length to 8 data bits This is the default for Async mode 7 Sets data length to 7 data bits This is the default for Sync mode 9 DirectMode Sets data length to 9 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode 6 DirectMode Sets data length to 6 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode The factory default is 8 data bits NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits see DTE Dialer configuration options group Total character size consists of a start bit number of data bits parity bits and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even pari
16. x lt or fre rs ce BlksErrd xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of data found in error block size is 1000 bits per block The message NoSync can appear as a value for BlksErrd while the modem s receiver is synchronizing The message OvrF lw can appear as the value for BlksErrd if the counter overflows Press the key to display BIksRcvd xxxxxxx number of blocks of data received The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without restarting the test The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd continue counting If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Tests section of Chapter 9 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Pattern is amp T2 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 8 7 Configure Branch OVEIVICW esida didi dtes HGS ep e ted eee eS COM SUTS Branch ac iere ntt tecncd Editing and Saving a Configuration Option SUMMALY sete sees sade cee fS ererereeBei eed Configuration Tables lille eens DTE Intetfaee Loos te RERO EE RI ERPRCT PES DTE DAET gir prO ERI PIER RRERUre ERE Line Diale nea vetrine Dig Ue visu asetace e Ee oh mat e iced Leased Ine uso
17. 21 CT140 RL 140 DTE Remote Loopback 22 RI CE 125 DCE Ring Indicator 23 CT111 CH 111 DTE Data Rate Selector 24 XTXC DA 113 DTE External Clock 25 TEST TM 142 DCE Test Mode E 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Pin Assignments EIA RS 366 A Pin Assignments Table E 2 lists the EIA 366 A pin assignments for the modem Table E 2 EIA RS 366 A Pin Assignments pects Name CCITT Signal Source Definition 2 DPR 211 DTE Digit Present 3 ACR 205 ACE Abandon Call and Retry 4 CRQ 202 DTE Call Request 5 PND 210 ACE Present Next Digit 6 PWI 213 ACE Power Indication 7 SG 201 Signal Ground 13 DSC 204 ACE Distant Station 14 NB1 206 DTE Digital Lead Pin 14 15 NB2 207 DTE Digital Lead Pin 15 16 NB4 208 DTE Digital Lead Pin 16 17 NB8 209 DTE Digital Lead Pin 17 18 RC ACE Receive Common 19 SC DTE Send Common 22 DLO 203 ACE Data Line Occupied 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 E 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems VF Connector Pin Assignments Tables E 3 and E 4 list the connector pin assignments for Model 3810 and Model 3820 modular jacks and the pin assignments for the TELCO jacks For 2 wire leased line connections to a JM8 network interface an 8 position to 6 position crossover cable see Figure E 1 must be used according to the following FCC requirements The RJ series of jacks should not be used for connecting data equipment to nonswitched pri
18. 8 6 End to End Patter Test 2 0 seat chats rh pea Pos Re ERRORI YQ EQ 8 7 9 DCP Configuration Process cise cides Ere e tees edie Roe RIP PER EE 9 2 9 2 AT Command Configuration Process 0 0 eee eee eee 9 3 11 1 Top Level Menu of a Remote 3800 Series Modem 005 11 3 E 1 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable E 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Table of Contents List of Tables Tables Page 4 1 Model 3810 and Model 3811 DCP LEDS i c 4 cie bl ieebe seer se ee bake 4 4 4 2 Model 3820 DOP LEDS ccc oe t hei aie diwh dd bet eae be aise bored 4 5 4 3 DCP RBs cosas Uhh eben a oR eae ak nein ae YEN Gee n ertt 4 5 4 4 Top Level Menu Stas cic cc h0i casei gee efe PERI ERG eee eee 4 8 4 5 Common Operational Messages 0 cee eee ce eee ee eee 4 11 4 6 Dial Access Security Messages 2 0 502 ldem peek ede ke nde eae eee 4 12 5 1 Vald Dial Command Modifiers incessit arde ccert pew REG RES 5 6 9 DTEInterface Configuration Options csse ee eee Ire en 9 8 9 2 DTE Dialer Configuration OptionS cis skile rece ERE EE DR SEES RE REG 9 15 9 3 Line Dialer Configuration OpUOns iius ha sae cong Rer RES ERS 9 20 9 4 Dial Lme Configuration OpUOnS 6 00 er eben eem me RP 9 26 9 5 Leased Line Configuration Options sore RII EE REPRE PERS 9 29 9 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options 02 0 eee eee eee eee 9 34 0 7 Test Config
19. AT command for Delay to Data is amp S5 AT command for Dial Backup Toggle is amp S6 RTS Action Ignore Nxt Ignore Stndrd RS232 Sim Cntl Car Request to Send Action RTS is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating the DTE has data to send to the modem Ignore Modem assumes RTS is always ON Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA 232 D operation In direct mode RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the modem Simulated Control Carrier RTS input controls the remote modem s LSD signal This is used for DTEs that require Line Signal Detect LSD to toggle ON and Off to simulate half duplex operation NOTE f RTS Action is set for simulated control carrier then the remote modem s LSD Control configuration option must be set for Simulated Control Carrier Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V 13 specifications This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS CTS flow control is selected For Async Dial and UNIX Dial Ignore is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased Stndrd RS232 is the factory default AT command for Standard RS232 is amp RO AT command for Ignore is amp R1 AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp R2 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 11 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 1 5 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options
20. Configure Branch Table 9 6 4 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Flw Cntl of Mdm Disable Nxt Disable XON XOFF RTS to Mdm Flow Control of Modem Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem Disable The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon XON and XOFF characters received from the DTE RTS to Modem Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based upon the ON and Off state of the DTE s RTS signal The factory default is Disable AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q2 and Q4 AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q5 AT commands for CTS to DTE are Q3 and Q6 XON XOFF Psthru Disable Nxt Disable Enable XON XOFF Passthrough Considers an XON XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem In this case the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE This is also known as DTE to DTE flow control Disable Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem Enable Flow control characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem The factory default is Disable NOTE This configuration option is only available if the Flow Control configuration option is configured for XON XOFF AT command for Disable is VXO AT command for Ena
21. DTR Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE EC Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to failure to negotiate Error Control mode Inv Rate Disc When using V 32bis modulation the remote modem does not support the data rate used by the local modem LnCurrnt Disc The modem has disconnected due to the loss of line current LongSpace Disc The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space NoData Disc The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received data Disconnecting The modem has begun the disconnect sequence Rmt Cmnded Disc The modem has disconnected due to a V 32 Cleardown received from the remote modem Talk Mode The modem is in Talk mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 9 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 4 4 3 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Dial Backup Indicates Messages Dial Standby The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode DialBckUp MR The modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate and is configured for Direct mode Backup MR EC The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for error control and data compression on leased lines Stndby MR EC The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for error control and data compression on leased lines Firmware Download Result Messages Ind
22. Model 3810 and Model 3820 Telephone Connection Dial Network Management System Connection AC Power Transformer Connection 20 0 eee ee ee eee Modem Power UD 2112s eLeLbRI e hep Mer rene debes ein es Removing and Replacing Model 3810 and Model 3820 Modems 3 Model 3811 Installation OVEIMICW prerii kepe r send es GE ARS etek d e FER Model 3811 Installation xc re Ree e eh Mer Removing and Replacing Model 3811 Modems 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems 4 DCP Operation D I FC EE 4 1 Diagnostic Control Panels zio I TR ERR RUE 4 1 Status Indie ars cool osi dee Pete cele eae ead hanes 4 4 Diagnostic Control Panel Operation 00 4 6 Menu SWC IES ovo orb See ht ete t en lee ee oe heat gin es 4 7 Selecting Factory Configuration Options 4 13 Diagnostic Control Panel Security Access 005 4 15 5 Call Setup Branch OVEIMIOW oy ko ie et as a ee bete RU deed 5 1 Call Setup Branch 22 os eerte oe ree 5 2 6 Talk Data Branch OVEIVIOW oeste tee he onde eee eee bee nee Mee vs Mie 6 1 Talk Data Branch 22e 640068 tee de vehPER cde he se ehe RES 6 1 7 Status Branch OVEIMIEW colis iere e rA EE hw ae web ane ER e OE 7 1 Status Branch 4 ces hain cos e UPS e UEA ECOLE EB Ha 7 2 8 Test Branch JI FeCRPCRCC 8 1 Test Branch geellhReSeb Re R
23. Nxt T 008 ASCI Backspace Character Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode The factory default is 08 ASCII backspace character AT command is S register S5 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 Linefeed Char 010 ASCI Nxt T 010 ASCI Line Feed Character Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Command mode for responses from the modem The factory default is 10 ASCII line feed character AT command for Line Feed Character is S register S4 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 Result Codes Enable Nxt Enable Disable EnablelnOrig Result Codes Result codes are informational messages such as Connect and Ring sent from the modem and displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal For a list of result codes refer to Table B 1 in Appendix B Enable Modem sends result codes to the DTE Disable Modem does not send result codes to the DTE EnablelnOrig For UNIX applications enable result codes only on the originating modem This prevents the DTE on the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts For Async Dial Enable is the factory default For UNIX Dial EnablelnOrig is the factory default AT command to enable is QO AT command to disable is Q1 AT command to enable in Originate mode is Q2 ExtendResltCode Enable Nxt Enable Disable Add EC Add V42 MNP Use DTE Rate Extended Result Codes Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control are dis
24. Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test If the modem consistently registers errors contact your service representative If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists then the problem is likely not with your modem 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 C 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table C 2 Modem DTE Connection Symptom Action Modem does not accept or echo back AT commands Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a standard RS 232 cable If the cable is bad replace it Null modem cables also known as crossover cables do not work in this application Verify that the Command Echo Character configuration option is enabled Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 9 Configure Branch or ATE command Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 9 Configure Branch or the AT amp M or AT amp Q command in Chapter 14 Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 9 or the ATQ command in Chapter 14 Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all configuration options are returned to their proper setting Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return Verify that the ASCII value of a carriage return matches what is used by the DTE and the modem Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 9 or the S3 register i
25. Set Access Ctrl A Set_Orig_Sec Gc 5 W 85 CJ Press the key until Set Orig Sec appears Select Set Orig Sec Table 12 3 describes the settings of the Set Originate Security group option Table 12 3 Set Originate Security Group Options Set Orig Sec No OrigSec EnaOrigSec command is canceled Set Originate Security Controls the security protection for origination of calls when AT commands are used The originate password must be included in all AT dial command strings if this configuration option is enabled If not included or incorrectly entered the message ERROR is returned to the DTE No Originate Security Disables originate security so that a modem can originate a call using AT commands Enable Originate Security When using AT commands the modem will only place a call if a valid password is entered along with an AT dial command If the password is not entered then ERROR is returned to the DTE and the dial 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 9 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Set Admin PsWd Set Administrative Password is used to change the Administrative Password value The Administrative Password is an 8 digit decimal number that allows authorized users to enter the Access Security Control function NOTE If this value is forgotten then the only way to access any of the security functions is by selecting Reset Security This restores the password to a known valu
26. Use DTE Rate Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate DIAL TONE DETECT Enable Sets the modem for dial tone detect Disable Sets the modem for blind dialing BUSY TONE DETECT Enable Modem monitors for busy tone Disable Modem ignores busy tone Yn Long Space Disconnect Configure Edit Line YO Disable Ignores long space Dialer Y1 Enable Disconnects if long space is detected Enables transmission of a long space Zn Reset and Load Active Control Reset ZO Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating Z1 Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Active Operating Z2 Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active Operating Z3 Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating and performs a soft reset if the modem is connected it is disconnected Z9 Performs a full modem reset as if the power were turned off and on 14 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 1 5 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT sae Front Panel Command Description Branch amp Cn LSD Control Configure Edit DTE amp CO Forced On LSD on at all times Interface amp C1 Standard RS232 LSD is on when the remote modem s carrier signal is detected LSD is off when carrier signal is not detected amp C2 Wink When Disconnect LSD normally forced ON turns Off for approximately one second upon disconnecting amp C2 Wink When Disconnect LSD normally
27. amp F0 amp F3 amp F5 and amp F6 commands leave the modem in AT Command mode The other commands place the modem into Dumb mode The only way to return to AT command control is via the front panel amp Gn V 22bis Guard Tone Configure Edit Dial Line amp GO Disable amp G1 550 Hz amp G2 1800 Hz 14 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 1 7 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT ee Front Panel Command Description Branch amp I Dial Transmit Level Configure Edit Dial Line When Dial Transmit Level Type is set to Permissive amp In sets Dial Transmit Level to a value between 10 and 32 dBm amp I99 and amp 1100 cause the level to be varied automatically according to conditions for Enhanced Throughput Cellular ETC operation amp I10 10 dBm amp I11 11 dBm amp I32 32 dBm amp I99 Automatically adjusted according to the ETC1 0 specification Use only with remote modems set to amp I99 and limit the data rate to 4800 bps S41 5 Set by amp F6 amp I100 Automatically adjusted according to the ETC1 1 specification NOTE amp JO overrides this command amp In overrides the amp JO command amp Jn Dial Transmit Level Type Configure WEditiDial Line amp JO Permissive Approx 9 dBm amp J1 Programmable NOTE amp Jn overrides the amp In command amp Ln Leased Mode Configure Edit eased amp LO Disables leased line operation Line amp
28. if any entered for x up to 40 characters in length in Directory Location n 1 10 For example the command AT amp Z1 5551234 stores the telephone number 555 1234 into directory location 1 To clear a telephone number from a memory location issue the amp Zn x command without entering a telephone number Call Setup Change Directory 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 11 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems N1 Direct Mode W2 MNP or Disconnect W3 MNP or Buffer W4 V 42 MNP or Disconnect W5 VA2 MNP or Buffer W6 LAPM or Disconnect W7 LAPM or Buffer Table 14 1 10 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT oe Front Panel Command Description Branch An Maximum Frame Size Configure Edit AO 64 V42 MNP Buffer A1 128 A2 192 A3 256 A4 32 A5 16 Cn Error Control Negotiate Buffer Configure Edit CO Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable C2 Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode Dn CTS Control Configure Edit DTE DO Forced On Forces CTS to always ON Interface D1 Standard RS232 D2 Wink When Disconnect CTS is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect D3 Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR Gn Modem to Modem Flow Control Configure Edit GO Disable V42 MNP Buffer G1 Enable Kn Break Buffer Control Send Break Control Break Forces Escape Break Buffer Control Configure Edit Break Send Break V42 MNP Buf
29. n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable RemAccssPasswrd 00000000 Nxt 1 00000000 Remote Access Password Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a local modem The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem CAUTION A remote access password should be selected for security purposes NOTE If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable the password has no effect AT command equivalent is S registers S56 w S57 x S58 y and S59 z where wis the leftmost pair of digits x is the second pair of digits y is the third pair of digits and z is rightmost pair or fourth pair of digits For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then the value for S56 is 1 and 2 and the value for S59 is 7 and 8 Dir 1_Callback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Directory Location 1 Callback This configuration option controls whether or not the modem s single number callback function is used Disable Modem does not use the single number callback function Enable Modem answers a call disconnects and dials the number stored in directory location 1 NOTE This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled The factory default is Disable AT Command to Disable is S register S67 0 AT Command to Enable is S register S67 1 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 43 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 8 3
30. uec qoe eter tior eem eo aen m Bue R OE ERa F 3 Disregard Incoming Call DIC 112v REV ELRRREEBE REESE EA dem setae ex pa F 3 Connect Incoming Call CIG sso enc te mex RR nia wer sia EE Rh E EX RR F 3 Program Normal PRIN c sooo SR CR Meque qe eedem pd e std al dearer bun Seaboard F 3 Request List of Stored Numbers REN seweb sce eR Eee DIR REI RR UICE PE RIRC F 3 List Stored Number Response LSN ies eR DRReresec ese ere er C eDIRERURR eee E dees F 3 Conmand i PE F 4 Valid VAL 2lecopesresrieeexr ek kereeer v eekieseb eed UDEXeC d e Re bx eth F 4 Invalid INV oreertexexe bv end be aE b P EK e E be ales rir Ted PR F 4 Overview The following section discusses those V 25bis CCITT V 25bis is an international dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in either Asynchronous Bisynchronous or HDLC operating mode The 3800 Series modems support V 25bis request and answer commands that initiate and cancel dialing program commands that allow you to create and enter telephone numbers to memory and list commands that display all telephone numbers stored in directory locations As commands are entered from the DTE the 3800 Series modems issue a response to the DTE which indicates if the call failed or connected or if the command is valid or invalid commands supported by the 3800 Series modems and the response to those commands Tables F 1 and F 2 in the Command Response section list the V 25bis
31. 02 Secondary Prim data blckd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using Remote Mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 11 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Remote Branch The following conditions must be met before using the Remote branch e Aconnection using either the dial network or leased lines must be established e The Access from Remote configuration option must be enabled in the remote modem The Remote Access Password configuration option must be the same for both the local and remote modems Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the primary or secondary channel if available of the VF line Using the primary channel gives a much faster response time due to the higher data rate but it also interrupts data flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode is active Once Remote mode is terminated the primary channel is automatically made available to data transmission Unlike primary channel communications the secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and does not interrupt data flow V 32bis and V 32 are the only modulations available on the secondary channel To access the Remote branch make the following selections Online 19 2 aN Control ES ah Press the key until Remote appears Select Remote NOTE If a connection is not established between a local 3800 Series modem and a remote 3800 Series modem the LCD displays Remote
32. 12 4 PSC CCS i0 M E 12 5 Adrministrative PassWord 1 ue tacere ce aae poete ea estero Rae aeter as 12 5 MeitPass wa lable ore E i DII adie bes meet aded teas rame cue 12 6 Det AnS Wer 6G Loeselesesqeuc px d eg wed ke aks gad tia eda Soe das ee ie 12 8 SEU DBIS BBC oss tes sas er pe eger eade Pues pectus car s ta intu oben ooh e ao ottiene 12 9 pet Adma PSWd ioi lil Re Pere ER ey aes hal Saris NEUES wad wae cos 12 10 Reset Security cSemdkes me cete p Eee e eR DRG ee P EAT C UREPRREDERCERP UN E RR NS 12 10 Security Password Entry Techitiques 1 soe sciences metre eto t e eo acre pet ab or 12 11 Answer Access Password VF Side and DTE Side Entry Techniques 0008 12 11 Ornsinate Access Password secare erer HROY tian eti nr e be bred e nep Sodas 12 12 Database Table BXAmplgS 2 ouem eet reta e renes ere Peat and deest eac ene Ps areis s 12 12 Overview NOTE This chapter supports the operation of dial access security for the COMSPHERE 3800 Series modems This chapter is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of dial access security operation Although the security functions described in this chapter are designed to prevent unwanted user access to your network the company recognizes that no security system is infallible Dial Access Security is an optional feature that allows you to control who has access to your COMSPHERE 3800 Series modem
33. 13073 03 SELECT ne LCD TAT KEY INDIGATORS cae OK Alarm BckUp Test EC M NETWORK ERROR DEVICE CORRECTION ALARM DIAL TEST BACKUP MODE Figure 4 3 Optional SDCP Model 3811 Faceplate and Optional SDU 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Status Ind icato rs Model 3811 s faceplate the SDCP and the SDU faceplate Figure 4 3 The standalone Model 3810 modem s DCP has 12 LEDs and the carrier mounted Model 3811 has 16 LEDs These LEDs are listed and described in Table 4 1 LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate model number shown in the table The 3800 Series modems status indicators continuously provide information on the modem s operating condition All of the status indicators on the Model 3810 and Model 3820 appear on the DCP Figures 4 1 and 4 2 whereas the status indicators for the carrier mounted Model 3811 are located on the Table 4 1 Model 3810 and Model 3811 DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates Pwr green ON Power is on and the modem is capable of operating Alrm red Flashing A malfunction has been detected in either the modem or COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Diag green The modem has responded to a diagnostic command from network management 3810 only DTR 108 green The DTE has turned ON DTR or the modem has forced DTR ON Test 142 yellow The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible Dial green Flashing T
34. 16 800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps V 22bis 2400 bps V 22 1200 bps V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps and Bell 103J 300 bps Two wire four wire Leased Line Modulations V 32terbo 19 200 and 16 800 bps V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps V 22bis 2400 bps Convenient migration to new or optional features through software downloading CCITT V 42bis and MNP Class 5 data compression Virtual error free data integrity with CCITT V 42 and MNP Level 4 error control Automatic and manual single call dial backup and dial standby capabilities for 4 wire leased line applications Model 3810 and Model 3811 A unique Paradyne modem pooling feature that preserves the answering modem s permanent configuration but allows multiple users to temporarily adapt parameters for individual requirements Dial line data rates from 300 bps 19 200 bps Leased line rates from 2400 bps 19 200 bps Asynchronous dial DTE data rates from 300 bps 115 200 bps A diagnostic control panel DCP on the front bezel that displays the connect status data rate type of error control or compression test results alarm status of DTE or VF parameters for both local and remote modems Storage of up to 10 telephone numbers to directory locations Compatibility with the industry de facto standard AT Command set Dialing via DCP AT co
35. 2 Model 3820 DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates RTS 105 green RTS signal is ON CTS 106 green CTS signal is ON TXD 103 green The modem is receiving data from the DTE to transmit ON equals space LSD 109 green The modem receiver has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the DTE RXD 104 green Data is being transferred to the DTE ON equals space SQ yellow The receive telephone line signal is degraded Table 4 3 SDCP LEDs Label Color Indicates OK green Power is ON and the modem is capable of operating Alrm red The modem has detected a problem with its operation For example the modem failed a self test BckUp yellow The modem originally configured for leased line operation is now operating on dial networks in a Dial Backup mode Test yellow The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible EC green Modem is in Error Control mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Diagnostic Control Panel Operation The 3800 Series modem s diagnostic control panel DCP is the user interface to all functions used to configure and control the modem This interface includes the status light emitting diodes LEDs and a two line 32 character liquid crystal display LCD and keypad Figure 4 4 Use the DCP to display the following kinds of information e Operational status e Configuration options e DCP entry displays e Remote modem acce
36. 2 3 Call Answer commands V 25bis F 3 Call Request commands V 25bis F 2 Call Response V 25bis F 2 Call Setup branch 5 1 Carriage Return Character 9 16 Carriage Return Character S3 14 16 Carrier On Level 9 33 CCITT Bell Mode B 14 3 Cellular Mobile 9 45 Cellular Enhancement 9 39 Cellular Enhancements S91 14 26 Cellular RJ11 Adapt 9 45 Cellular RJ11 Adapt S93 14 26 Change Directory 5 5 character format 14 2 C 4 Choose Function 9 5 Clone to Remote 10 4 Command Character Echo 9 16 Command Echo E 14 4 command entry guidelines 14 2 Command mode 14 1 command responses V 25bis F 4 COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS 1 1 connection 2 7 configuration options 9 7 9 47 Dial Line 9 26 DTE Interface 9 7 editing and saving 9 5 error control 9 34 factory default G 1 for cellular 14 8 Leased Line 9 29 Line Dialer 9 20 Miscellaneous 9 42 saving 14 11 Security 9 46 selecting 4 13 Tests 9 40 V 42 MNP Buffer 9 34 viewing 14 11 Configure branch 9 4 connection ac power 2 7 COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS 2 7 dial network 2 6 dial line 2 6 DTE 2 4 leased line 2 7 telephone 2 7 Control branch 10 1 CT111 Rate Control 9 14 CT111 Rate Control S61 14 22 CTS Control 9 12 CTS Control D 14 12 Customer configuration areas 9 1 D Lead signaling 9 25 Data Bits 9 8 Data mode 14 1 14 5 data rate B command 14 13 data rate dial line 9 26 data rate leased line 9 29 DCP Dia
37. 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 8 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S62 V 25bis Coding Configure Edit DTE Dialer Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 ASCII 1 EBCDIC Factory setting is ASCII S63 V 25bis Idle Character Configure Edit DTE Dialer Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Mark 1 Flag Factory setting is Mark S64 V 25bis New Line Character Configure Edit DTE Dialer Register identifies to the modem the type of line terminator used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Carriage Return and Line Feed 1 Carriage Return 2 Line Feed Factory setting is carriage return and line feed CR LF S65 Line Current Disconnect Configure YEditLine Dialer Register determines if the modem disconnects if an 8 millisecond or 90 millisecond interruption in loop current occurs Register has the following values 0 Enable 8msec 1 Enable 90msec 2 Disable Factory setting is Enable 8msec S66 NMS Call Messages Configure Edit Misc Register determines if the modem sends information regarding status Call Progress and or sends summarized call statistics Call Connect to the network management sys
38. 5 3 14 3 B CCITT Bell Mode 14 3 D Dial 5 6 14 3 DS Dial Stored Number 5 2 14 4 E Command Character Echo 9 16 14 4 echo C 2 format 14 3 H Hook Switch Control 5 3 14 4 I Identification 7 3 14 5 L Speaker Volume 9 43 14 5 list of 14 2 M Speaker Control 9 42 14 5 O Online mode 14 5 Q Result Codes 9 17 14 5 Sr Display S register Value 14 5 Sr n Change S register 14 5 using to change factory presets 4 13 V Result Codes Format 9 18 14 6 X Extended Result Codes Dial Tone Detect Busy Tone Detect 9 17 9 20 9 21 14 6 Y Long Space Disconnect 9 22 14 6 Z Reset and Load Active 14 6 AT Escape Character 9 16 Auto Dial Standby 9 33 Auto Dial Standby S47 14 21 Auto Make Busy S40 14 19 Auto Originate 14 20 Auto Redial 9 32 Auto Redial DTR 14 18 Auto Redial Leased Line 14 18 Auto Answer Ring Number S0 14 16 Auto Answer Ring Count 9 20 Automatic Firmware Download Center 10 6 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Index 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Automatic Make Busy 9 24 automatic redialing 9 19 9 24 9 32 14 19 AutoSync 14 10 Backspace Character 9 17 Backspace Character S5 14 16 Bad Lines Auto Originate 9 31 Bad Lines Auto Originate S46 14 20 Bell Mode 14 3 Blind Dial Pause 9 21 Blind Dial Pause S6 14 16 Break Buffer Control 9 38 Break Forces Escape 9 16 Busy Tone Detect 9 21 cables carrier mount 3 2 standalone
39. CARD CONNECTOR Bo RS 366A V 25 EDGE CARD CONNECTOR B Oo EIA232 V 24 OO0O00000000000 O00000000000 3800 V 35 3600 3500 RS366A V 25 OOOOOOOOO0O0O0O0O0 OOOOOOOOOOCOO RS 366A V 25 CONNECTOR 496 13155 02 Figure 3 1 Model 3811 Model 3811 Installation The Model 3811 is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies operating power and the dial and or leased line network connections For correct power DTE dial line leased line NIM and network management cabling information refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has 17 slots which can hold up to 16 modems and one Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU The SDU is required when the modems in the carrier are controlled by an NMS or when multiple carriers in a cabinet configuration are to be controlled by a single shared diagnostic control panel SDCP The SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier is the user interface to the Model 3811 modem A single SDCP can control up to eight carriers containing up to 128 compatible modems 3 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3811 Installation The installation of a Model 3811 varies slightly if an SDCP is installed on the front of the carrier To install a Model 3811 modem into the carrier without an SDCP perform the following steps CAUTION If the Model 3811 is removed from t
40. COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Pattern through the modem For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test Asynchronous Direct mode Otherwise the message pattern It can also be used with a local analog loopback Invalid Bffr Mde appears when this test is started See or a remote digital loopback to simulate data passing Figures 8 4 through 8 6 TRANSMITTER GENERATOR 511 PATTERN DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE COMPARATOR 511 PATTERN RECEIVER 491 13075a Figure 8 4 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test RECEIVER TRANSMITTER DTE 511 PATTERN DTE INTERFACE pkg NETWORK INTERFACE GENERATOR ERRD 511 PATTERN TEST TRANSMITTER RECEIVER PATTERN LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM 491 13075b Figure 8 5 Pattern Test and Remote Digital Loopback Test 8 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Test Branch RECEIVER COMPARATOR 511 PATTERN DTE INTERFACE GENERATOR 511 PATTERN TRANSMITTER LOCAL MODEM TRANSMITTER GENERATOR 511 PATTERN NETWORK DTE INTF 511 PATTERN RECEIVER REMOTE MODEM 491 13075c Figure 8 6 End to End Pattern Test To access Pattern from the Test branch make the following selections Test es ics GC E89 8 L8 amp Press the gt key until Pattern appears Select Pattern to start this test Test Pattern gt A Ee Errd XXXXXXX
41. Configure Branch for more information regarding default factory configuration options Using AT Commands When using AT commands the following criteria must be met e Make sure the asynchronous DTE s communication software is configured for 10 bit character format for example 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit e Make sure the DTE RS 232D cable is attached to the DTE connector on the rear of the Model 3810 or 3820 modem or for the Model 3811 modem the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and the correct serial communications port on the asynchronous DTE 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 13 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems If the modem does not return OK refer to Appendix C On initial power up the modem is in Command mode To verify that the modem is connected and functioning properly enter the following TYPE AT PRESS Return Enter The screen displays OK Troubleshooting NOTE If you have already changed the factory preset configuration you may have lost AT command control To regain AT command control select via the DCP the Async Dial factory preset configuration as described earlier in Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP To change a factory template using AT commands perform the following steps for more information on changing factory templates using AT commands refer to Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers 1 Use the AT amp F amp W command
42. Format section To enter online Command mode while in Data mode enter the following sequence TYPE 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Use the O command to return to Data mode from online Command mode Enter the following command TYPE ATO PRESS Enter Command Guidelines Review the following guidelines before using any AT Commands e The escape sequence is used to enter online Command mode from Data mode e The asynchronous character format for the AT command set must be one of the following 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 data bits parity 1 stop bit parity can be odd even mark or space e All commands except A repeat last command and must begin with the characters AT and end by pressing the Enter key The AT or at prefix clears the command buffer and matches the modem speed and parity to that of the DTE Commands can be upper or lowercase but the modem will not recognize mixed case prefixes At or aT e Commands can be entered one at a time or in strings Strings can have up to 40 characters after the AT prefix You can use spaces hyphens and parentheses as fillers to make the commands easier to read the modem ignores these fillers and they are not counted among the characters which make up the command string Commands must be entered on one line and end with the car
43. Idle Fill 9 18 V 25bis New Line Character 9 19 V 25bis New Line Character S64 14 23 V 32bis Automode 9 26 V 32bis Automode S78 14 24 V 32bis Autorate 9 27 9 30 V 32bis Autorate S82 14 25 V 32bis Train 9 28 V 32bis Train S43 14 20 V 42 ARQ Window Size Increase S89 14 26 V 42bis Compression 9 35 V 42bis compression H 14 14 V 54 Address 9 41 V 54 Address S53 14 22 V 54 Device Type 9 41 V 54 Device Type S54 14 22 VF Prompt Type 9 46 VF rate 14 19 VF status 7 2 volume of speaker 14 5 Index 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20
44. LOCKED CIRCUIT PACK CIRCUIT OPEN UNLOCKED LATCH 495 11985a 03 Figure 3 3 Circuit Pack Lock Removing and Replacing Model 3811 Modems It is not necessary to power down the carrier to remove and replace a Model 3811 modem Perform the following steps CAUTION If the Model 3811 is removed from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3811 in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier Rotate the circuit pack lock until the release tab is exposed 2 Press down on the release tab and pull the modem away from the carrier s backplane 3 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation OVERVIEW colis ceed awh ad ewtete ee celts eee gorge I XR EE eg ba tie cae PR KS 4 1 Diasnostie Control Panels sicui see ripeto Dr ero OR tete n tick Aguas ete ia eco 4 1 Models 3810 and 3820 Diagnostic Control Panels 0 mesener eee eee eee tee eee 4 1 Model 3811 Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel 0 0 0 cece cece eee 4 3 Richter ir MORE PEE CE E DR C ge anne 5 2G Wak decks Ned Raw a ands deter otnedabecdraus Moma cates 4 4 Diasnostie Control Panel Operation 2 ou scarce cowie based aia desde ee lae ecd ede 4 6 LCD DISpIaY sire nesset eer DRTE EAE EE eSRRSS ON I PERE MEE ES UPC RMURT E REUS 4 6 Elidden Choice TMC RIOTS 1 5g eoe dence dice Per ea Etpe o pte br ace cte cna d 4 6 Tp PP E EEE EE S E
45. Pattern Local Loopback with Pattern Self Test Test amp T4 and amp T5 Configure Edit Tests amp Vn View Configuration Options Displays each configuration group within the Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration areas as well as the telephone numbers stores in directory locations 1 10 The output of the amp V command trapped by communications software and printed can be used as a configuration worksheet for a modem or network amp VO Active Operating configuration options amp V1 Active Saved configuration options amp V2 Customer 1 configuration options amp V3 Customer 2 configuration options amp V4 Directory locations 1 10 None amp Wn Write Save to Memory Saves the current configuration options in Active Operating to one of three configuration areas amp WO Saved to Active Save amp W1 Saved to Customer 1 amp W2 Saved to Customer 2 Configure Save amp Xn Transmit Clock Source amp X0 Internal Modem provides transmit clock source for synchronous data Pin 15 External Modem derives external transmit clock source provided on Pin 24 for synchronous data Receive Clock Loop Modem derives transmit clock source from receive signal for synchronous data Pin 17 amp X1 amp X2 Configure Edit DTE Interface amp Znzx Store Telephone Numbers Modem saves the telephone numbers and dial command modifiers
46. Remote Modem Is Configured for Auto Answer ss 6 2 Manual Dialing when the Remote Modem Is Configured for Manual Answer 6 2 Placing Modems into Talk Mode Once Modems Are Online sscrisictsnesrricrririssnsisss 6 2 Overview Talk Data Branch The Talk Data branch of the Top Level menu allows The following sections describe three uses of the you to switch the modem between Talk mode and Data Talk Data function mode when manually dialing using either the DCP or attached telephone On initial power up the modem is in Talk mode When in Talk mode the modem is disconnected and you are free to use the telephone When in Data mode the modem is connected and data can be transmitted or received This function is only available for Model 3810 and Model 3820 modems CN Tik Data 494 13085 02 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 6 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Manual Dialing when the Remote Modem Is Configured for Auto Answer If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Auto Answer perform the following procedure Idle 19 2 A Tlk Data m x F1 F2 F3 DL Press the key until Tlk Data is displayed Lift the attached handset and dial the telephone number of the remote modem When the remote modem answers it transmits an answer tone Idle 19 2 Status A Tlk Data CA jm J lel le Cm
47. This occurs every time you enter the Security branch Select the F2 key to increment password values Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the full Administrative Password value appears and then press Ent Set Access Ctrl gt A Edit PassWd Table A lt be 8 gt If the correct value is entered the EditPassWdTable group appears on the LCD Press the key to scroll the Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password groups into view If an incorrect administrative password is entered then the message PassWrd Invalid appears as well as the last password entered Enter the correct password value or press the A or X key to exit the Security branch 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems EditPasswdTable The Password Table is the modem s security database It contains all essential information for each password stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory The information associated with each password is known as a record Records are identified by an index which is a numeric name for a single record A password s record is retrieved by entering its index The Edit Password Table group allows you to view and or change the modem s security database table To do this you must retrieve a password s records by selecting its index as described below The Edit
48. Use Directory Locations 1 2 S37 22 Use Directory Locations 1 3 S37 23 Use Directory Locations 1 4 S37 9 Use Directory Locations 1 10 NOTE The modem must be in Originate mode to perform an automatic dial backup 14 18 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 4 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S38 DTR Cont Repeat Configure EdiADTE Dialer Determines whether automatic dialing of dial backup directory locations will be repeated continuously or halted after the first pass Regardless of the setting of S38 dialing is locked out after ten failed attempts to connect to the same number Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable 39 Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay Configure Edit Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to V42 MNP Buffer send data in its Receive Buffer to the DTE after the modem is commanded by the DTE to disconnect or after the modem detects a line disconnect Register has the following values 39 0 Disable Immediate disconnect 39 1 1 second 39 2 2 seconds S39 255 255 seconds Factory setting is Disable 0 S40 Auto Make Busy Configure YEditLine Dialer Register determines if the modem goes off hook under certain conditions This register should only be enabled when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX This register i
49. and ultimately your host DTE To take advantage of this security feature you must create a database of passwords which are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory COMSPHERE 3800 Series modems can store a maximum of 20 passwords A Model 3811 with the optional Password Expansion Feature can store up to 3000 passwords Each password is assigned a series of parameters that determine the type of security protocol applied to it This protocol is established in the Security branch of the Top Level menu Control of security functions is established in the Security Configuration Options group which is located in the Configuration branch of the Top Level menu These areas are described in the Security Branch section of this chapter and the Security Configuration Options section in Chapter 9 The COMSPHERE 3800 Series modem uses an outbound and inbound method of security known respectively as Originate Access and Answer Access security Both methods of security require some type of password entry whether it be included as part of an AT command dial string or entered directly from a remote user s DTE 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Originate Access Security Originate Access lets you control who can originate a call from a local modem via the AT command set This is useful in LAN and modem pooling applications With Originate Access security a local user s password is embedded in the AT dial comm
50. certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Safety Instructions Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connec
51. character 12 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security NOTE While pulse dial can be used to originate the call DTMF tones must be used for the password This can be accomplished by using the P and T modifiers appropriately Refer to the Dial command in Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers for more on modifiers This method of password entry requires that the answering modem be a 3800 Series modem Of course the 3800 Series modem must be configured for VF side password entry and the originating user must know the correct VF side password The originating modem can be another 3800 Series modem or any vendor s modem Some originating modems may not recognize the W modifier as a wait for second dial tone If your call disconnects due to a VF Password Timeout or an Unknown VF Password first verify that the answering 3800 Series modem s VF Prompt Type is set for 2nd Dial Tone Next verify that the Dial Tone Detect configuration option in the originating modem is enabled Third insert several Pause modifiers into the dial string instead of the W modifier For the 3800 Series modem each Pause which is determined by the Pause Time configuration option S8 is equal to 2 seconds This allows a delay between the processing of the phone number by the answering modem and the transmission of the VF side password by the originating modem Some experimentation may be necessary to determine the number
52. column and the value for n is listed in the AT commands are entered in Command mode using the Description column following format TYPE ATXn Where X is the AT command and n is the specific value for that command PRESS Enter Table 14 1 1 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT Front Panel Command poseripion Branch A Repeat Last Command Call Setup Answer Re executes last command string Not to be preceded with AT or followed by pressing the Return key A Answer Mode None Goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection without waiting for a ring Bn CCITT Bell Mode Determines the protocol used if the dial line rate is set to 300 or 1200 bps It has no effect if the rate is set to another value See B B BO V 21 or V 22 300 or 1200 bps B1 Bell 103 or Bell 212A 300 or 1200 bps The factory default is B1 Dn Dial None Begins the dialing sequence The dial string n modifiers and telephone number is entered after the D command Any digit 0 9 A B C D may be dialed as a DTMF tone Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode The following example shows how to dial through a PBX The dial string consists of the command string and the telephone number ATD9W5551234 Command Telephone String Number Dial String Modifiers include the following parameters T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 4 A B C or D can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only the digits 0 9 can be
53. command and response and the analogous AT command NOTE The 3800 Series modem must be configured for V 25bis dialing Refer to DTE Dialer Type configuration option in Chapter 9 Configure Branch 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 F 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Call Request Commands Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to the modem and are responsible for initiating any dial calls Call Request commands include Call Request with Number Provided CRN and Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS Call Request with Number Provided CRN The CRN command dials the telephone number entered from the DTE CRN is similar to the ATD command The CRN command format is CRNn Where nis the dial string The following characters are permitted T DTMF Dialing P Pulse Dialing 0 9 DTME Tones or Pulse Dialed Digits ABCD DTMF Tones R Reverse Dial Wait for Dial Tone Or lt User Defined Pause amp Flash Hook or gt Delimiters Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS The CRS command dials the telephone number stored in the request directory location CRS is similar to the ATDS command The CRS command format is CRSx Where x is directory location 1 10 The modem responds to the command with either a VAL valid or INV invalid response followed by a call progress report such as connect CNX or failure CFI Call Response A Call Response indica
54. conditions After the timer expires monitoring occurs as usual Possible delay times are 5 minutes 15 minutes or 1 hour The factory default is Disable no delay NOTE Fall Forward Delay appears under both the Dial Line configuration options and the Leased Line configuration options but the same setting is used for both Changing it in one place effectively changes it in the other There is no analogous AT command so this option is not available for modems without a shared or integral DCP 9 28 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch command is issued Leased Line Table 9 5 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory The Leased Line configuration options are used to default setting the default value if the modem is just configure the modem for operation over leased lines being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second The Leased Line configuration group only appears if de um line Following this is a description of the configuration the modem is configured with the Sync Leased factory preset template or when the amp L1 amp L2 amp L3 or amp L4 option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 5 1 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Leased Mode 4WLL Orig Nxt 4WLL Orig 4WLL Ans 2WLL Orig 2WLL Ans Leas
55. configuration option group or by value held in S register S8 W or Wait for dial tone Modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX For example 9W 555 6789 R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R parameter must be the last character in the dial string 9 Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status message Hook flash This causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call This permits you to enter long international telephone numbers or additional information such as a calling card number that would exceed the 40 character limit Space and These characters are ignored by the dial string and can be included to enhance readability End of Number Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator 5 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Talk Data Branch OVEIVIEW CT EMT 6 1 AUD GEA icr EUER 6 1 Manual Dialing when the
56. determines if a modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable Factory setting is Enable S56 Remote Access Password Configure Edit Misc Register allows entry of the first pair leftmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then S56 1 and 2 S57 Remote Access Password Configure Edit Misc Register allows entry of the second pair of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid S58 Remote Access Password Configure Edit Misc Register allows entry of the third pair of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid S59 Remote Access Password Configure Edit Misc Register allows entry of the fourth pair rightmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid S61 CT111 Rate Control Configure Edit DTE Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled set for Fallback 1 or Interface Fallback 2 CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate Control signal It is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V32bis Autorate and V32bis Automode configuration options Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Fallback 1 2 Fallback 2 Factory setting is Disable 14 22 November 1996
57. dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as character oriented protocol This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block The character length must be 7 data bits with odd parity and 1 stop bit V 25bis HDLC Selects V 25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as bit oriented protocol This framing protocol uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block DTR Dirs Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever DTR turns ON NOTE DTR dialing cannot be used if dial access security is enabled RS 366A Selects EIA RS 366 A as the dialing method and protocol used and available only with Model 3811 modems RS 366 A is a parallel interface typically used in older IBM9 synchronous environments Refer to Table E 2 in Appendix E for pinout information AT amp T Exclusive Enables a subset of the proprietary AT amp T command set which is required for some applications that use AT amp T equipment Currently the only application supported is AT amp T DATAKIT For Async Dial and UNIX Dial AT is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased Disable is the factory default AT commands for AT are amp MO amp M1 amp M3 amp Q
58. disconnect the modem from the service line and resume normal operation press the lt key once and the C key until Disc Serv Line appears Select Disc Serv Line The call and service line disconnect and the message Command Complete appears on the LCD 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 10 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems AT Command Equivalent There is no AT Command Equivalent for Service Line DownLoad Code The Download Code function sets parameters within the modem when transferring firmware to a remote modem or when receiving firmware upgrades from a locally attached PC based controller The latter should only be performed by customer service personnel There are two selections under Download Code Clone to Remote and To Local via DTE Clone to Remote is used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently stored in a 3800 Series modem to another 3800 Series modem For this to occur the modem must be connected to the remote modem via a leased line network or an established dial line network If these prerequisites do not exist then this selection does not appear on the LCD The second selection appearing on the LCD is To Local via DTE This function permits firmware upgrades to be transferred to a 3800 Series modem This type of download requires a locally attached PC controller to be connected to the modem s DTE port as well as special download software Any downloads using this selection are intended to be perfor
59. for 3800 Series Modems eese D 1 E l BIA 232 D Pin ASsigriments i user oe ek a ne eme t bw eb ER XE RERPES E 2 E 2 BIA amp 5 366 A Pin Assignments uoo oeiee pem bee em EE E EFRRS E 3 E 3 VF Connector Pin Assignments Models 3810 and 3820 E 5 E 4 VF Connector Pin Assignments TELCO Jacks 0 00 00 00 ee eee E 5 FI W25bus Commands looo hea Se RM RR ae bo bake eit F 4 EF 2 W25bis Response Messages e c cco k sls the sae et a de tee bad ok ee F 5 G 1 Factory Default Configuration Options llle G 1 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 v Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions This manual describes how to install and operate the COMSPHERE 3800 Series standalone and carrier mounted modems It is assumed that you have a basic understanding of modems and their operation How to Use This Manual Chapter 1 provides information about the 3800 Series modems features Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 provide instructions for installing the 3800 Series modems Chapter 4 provides the information required to operate the Model 3810 and Model 3820 using the diagnostic control panel DCP and the Model 3811 using the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Chapters 5 through 12 describe the eight branches of the front panel command sets Call Setup Talk Data Status Test Configure Control Remote and Security Chapter 13 provides an overview o
60. for Cleared XXXX Indicates the current index location value yyyyyyyy Indicates the current password value for this index If the Password Type is VF Entry or VF plus DTE then the password value is an 8 digit decimal number 2Zzzzz Indicates the current password value for this index If Password Type is configured for DTE Entry then the password value is a 10 character alphanumeric number Save Edit xxxx Edit Save Yes No Save Edit Saves any changes made in the EditPassWdTable group XXXX Indicates the current index field value Edit Returns the LCD to the Password Type option and does not save any changes made to the index or password table Save Saves changes made to the index or Password Table Once selected the Select Index screen appears and increments to the next index value Yes No Appears only if changes are made to any of the options within the Password Table and the or A key is pressed before reaching the Save Edit option After deciding whether or not to save changes the LCD displays Select Index and increments to the next index value 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Set Answer Sec To access Set_Answer_Sec from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Set Answer Security determines if dial access security is enabled or disabled This method of inbound security is Press the key until Set_Answer_Sec appears configured in the ans
61. forced ON turns Off for approximately one second upon disconnecting amp C3 Follows DTR State of LSD follows state of DTR amp C4 Simulated Control Carrier State of LSD follows state of remote modem s RTS amp C5 DTR Disconnect Off State of LSD follows state of DTR except upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns Off DTR must then toggle Off and ON to turn LSD ON Use this setting for AT amp T DATAKIT applications Note that to use this option the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd RS232 amp D1 or amp D2 amp C6 Bridge Retrain LSD behaves as if it were set for Stndrd RS232 except that it is turned off when a retrain condition lasts longer than 10 seconds and turned on again when no retrain condition is detected for a period of 10 seconds amp Dn DTR Action Configure Edit DTE amp DO oe Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it as always Interface N amp D1 OffzCommand Mode Modem enters online Command Mode if connected when DTR switches Off amp D2 Standard RS232 DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE amp D3 Off Reload Strap Follows Standard RS232 operation except that when DTR switches Off the modem loads the Active Saved area into the Active Operating area amp D4 Controls On Hook Follows Standard RS232 operation except that modem does not disconnect until DTR is lowered by the DTE amp D5 Controls TX Mute Follows Standard RS232 operation except that when DTR is lowered at t
62. identifies the modem Mod Model number is an alphanumeric number that identifies the modem as either a Model 3810 Model 3811 or Model 3820 modem FRev Firmware revision level is an alphanumeric number that identifies the level of firmware loaded in the modem HPt Hardware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies the circuit card in the modem FPt Firmware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies to service personnel the firmware release number To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent The AT command IO displays the product code normally 144 The AT command I1 displays a firmware revision number The AT command I2 performs an EPROM check and displays OK or Error The AT command I3 displays the modem s serial number The AT command I4 displays the modem s model number The AT command I5 displays the part number of the circuit card The AT command I6 displays the firmware release number The AT command I9 displays the firmware revision number same as I1 The AT command I10 alters the value of the product code displayed with the IO command See Chapter 14 for more information The AT command I11 performs a checksum of the modem s firmware and displays the results in hexadecimal There is no DCP equivalent of this command The AT command 119 displays the
63. make the following selection Call Setup A Dial Disconnect ez Gc J 8 L5 Select Dial to display the first directory telephone number Dial Directory ZN Nxt 01 5551234 irs To view other directory locations select Nxt Dial Directory 01 A Dialing Ha Once the directory location you want appears on the LCD press the F2 or F3 key to dial the number If the connection is successful the modem is online and one of the Normal Operation status messages appears on the LCD If the connection is not successful the LCD displays one of the Call Failure status messages See Table 4 4 in Chapter 4 AT Command Equivalent The AT command equivalent for Dial is DS n where n is directory location 1 10 5 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Call Setup Branch Disconnect Disconnect allows the modem to go on hook hang up Use this function when you want to disconnect an established call on a dial line NOTE When the Model 3820 is configured for leased line operation this function is not available and is not displayed on the LCD To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup A Dial Disconnect anes ees Select Disconnect Disconnect A RNE Complete A lt L a fre rs Cc The modem goes on hook hangs up and the call is disconnected This incl
64. modem is in The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages display the LCD alternates between the two message sets 4 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation Table 4 4 2 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Call Failure Indicates Messages Busy Signal The answering modem is busy Dial Line in Use The modem is already operating on dial networks when another call attempt has been issued Invalid Number The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory location No Answer Tone The answering modem has not answered within the time limit specified by the No Answer Timeout configuration option No Dial DTR The modem cannot dial because DTR is Off No Dial Test The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test No Dial Tone The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone No Quiet Answer The modem has detected No Quiet Answer before the time out setting of the No Answer Disconnect configuration option Trunk Busy The modem is receiving a fast trunk busy Call Disconnect Messages Indicates ATH Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command Bad Lines Disc The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the modulation and or data rate selected No Carrier Disc The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote modem
65. modem resets itself and displays a normal status message such as Idle 19 2 Reload your configuration options from the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area that you saved them to Download Failure If the download is interrupted the modem is left in a state in which it can only be used to make or receive a call for a download DownldOnly Mode ZN Call Setup Gm 5 L2 te CJ If an interruption occurs and your modem is left in this state repeat the download process by directing the modem to dial the Automatic Firmware Download Center See Chapter 5 Call Setup Branch for information about dialing a number using the DCP If you are unable to complete the download call your service representative 10 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Remote Branch 1 1 OVENI Lures utes equa ae kate terni visis NG boi tortue ts ae alg via eR a e CMS eue ds 11 1 Renge BMC nud xot an dose ete adis E SRI dO esa a a d ce sotat QNIN dre iu ce 11 2 Overview The Remote branch of the Top Level menu allows you to control the remote modem s DCP using the local modem s DCP This function allows you to change configuration options and control test functions in a remote modem Any changes made to configuration options while using the Remote branch are not saved until you exit the Remote branch This function is only available when using either V 32bis V 32 V 33 or V 29 modulation schemes Control 494 13090
66. modem to send and receive facsimile images Federal Communications Commission Board of Commissioners that regulates all interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United States Simultaneous two way communications One of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or increment an LCD entry Function keys are labeled F1 F2 and F3 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Glossary 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Group III half duplex handshaking HDLC hidden choice indicator host Hz idle JM8 keypad LCD leased line LED local analog loopback long space disconnect loopback test LSD menu tree MNP A fax standard that specifies a rate of transmission of about one page per minute Two way data communications allowed in only one direction at a time The exchange of predetermined codes and signals tones to establish a connection between two modems High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by ISO A symbol appearing in the upper right hand corner of the LCD indicating that more selections are available than what appears on the LCD A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the network A unit of frequency hertz that equals one cycle per second A state in which the modem s operating parameters can be modified or commands can be issued to the modem using either AT command
67. necessary S Register Format S registers can be displayed and or modified when the modem is in Command mode To display the value of an S register issue the following command TYPE ATSn Where PRESS Enter n is the register number To modify the value of an S register issue the following command TYPE ATSn r Where n is the register number and r is the new value PRESS Enter In Table 14 2 the value for n is listed in the S register column and the value for r is listed in the Description column 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 15 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 1 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S0 Auto Answer Ring Number Register determines number of rings the modem will count before automatically answering a call Enter zero 0 if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any calls Otherwise enter a value from 1 to 255 for the number of rings to count before answering Factory setting is 1 Configure WEditLine Dialer S2 AT Escape Character Register determines ASCII value used for escape sequence to enter Command mode from Data mode Enter a value from 1 to 127 for the escape character Any value greater than 127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence When the escape sequence is disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode until the call is disconnected Factory setting is 43 key
68. of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Err Contr Mode cont Direct Mode Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate The modem never connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate Ultimately the modem speed and DTE speed must be the same Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering LAPM or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Link Access Procedure for Modems LAPM error control mode If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This setting should be used for cellular connections at both the mobile and PSTN sides when it is known that both sides support V 42 LAPM or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in V 42 LAPM error control mode If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation NOTE The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased line modulation if V 42 error control or Buffer mode are enabled with V 32bis on leased lines For Async Dial and UNIX Dial V42 MNPorBfr is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased DirectMode is the factory default AT command for Buffer Mode is NO AT command for Direct Mode is N1 AT command for MNP or Disconne
69. of pauses necessary for your call DTE Side Passwords DTE side password entry requires the originating user to supply a valid password via his DTE This method of password entry occurs after the modems training sequence but before normal connection The modems must be configured for asynchronous operation to use this type of security When using DTE side password entry the modems go through their normal training and error control negotiation Once complete the answering modem requests a valid password from the originating user The originating user must enter via the DTE a password that can consist of digits and case insensitive letters Note that DTE passwords can be from to 6 characters in length The answering modem verifies the password against its password database table and if valid completes the data connection thus allowing DTE data to be passed As with VF side password entry the answering modem must be a 3800 Series modem and the originating modem can be either a 3800 Series modem or any vendor s modem The following example illustrates the format of DTE side password TYPE PRESS Enter Where abc123 abc123 is a 10 alphanumeric character number Characters used for DTE side passwords are case insensitive Combination of VF Side and DTE Side Passwords The previously described methods of password entry can be combined to provide two layers of security In this case the modems negotiate VF side pass
70. of this register expires Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape sequence followed by the amp TO command Enter a value from 0 to 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register Factory setting is Disable 0 S26 RTS to CTS Delay Configure Edit DTE Register sets the length of time in 10 millisecond increments the Interface modem waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the DTE Enter a value from 0 to 255 Factory setting is 0 milliseconds 34 1800 Hz Training Tone Configure Edit Leased Line This configuration option is for communication with certain modems that do not comply with the V 32 standard When 1800 Hz Training Tone is enabled a short burst of 1800 Hz AC tone is sent to the answering modem to prompt it to answer This is not required for V 32 compliant modems Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 17 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 3 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S35 Auto Redial Leased Line Configure Edit eased Line Auto Redial allows repeated automatic dial backup attempts by Auto Redial specifying the range of Directory Locations that can be tried A redial attempt is made in response to a bad phone number a busy signal no answer or no quiet answer The modem must be in Originate mode
71. or dial In leased line mode using direct mode DTR must be on for the modem to transmit or receive data Ignore Modem assumes DTR is always ON This is used when DTE does not provide DTR to the modem CnirlsOnHook Modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by the attached DTE This setting is required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the current session is terminated The setting is ignored if the modem receives a disconnect command from the DCP or from the COMSPHERE 6700 Network Management System OffzReloadStrp Like Standard RS232 except that when DTR is lowered the modem loads the Active Saved area into the Active Operating area Off CmdMode When the modem is online and DTR is Off for longer than the period specified by the S25 register the modem enters online Command mode The ATO command must be issued to return to data mode This setting has the same effect as Ignore if AT commands are disabled CntrisTXMute Like Standard RS232 except that when DTR is lowered at the answering modem the modem mutes transmitter output NOTE f V 25bis mode is used then this configuration option must be set for Stndrd RS232 The DTE must provide DTR to dial or answer a call When operating over the dial network this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108 2 Data Terminal Ready If DTE Dialer Type configuration option
72. side password Enable The user is prompted for a login ID and then a password if required by the setting of Answer Security Mode or the configuration of the VF side password NMS sends a disconnect command to the local modem if the login ID is invalid The factory default is Disable NMS Reporting 00 Nxt 1 00 NMS Reporting Determines whether and how dial access security events are reported to the NMS controller The possible values 00 15 represent a bit map The bits are normally set using the NMS controller The value of NMS Reporting is not affected by loading a factory default template The initial value when the modem is shipped is 00 Answer Secur No Answ Sec Nxt No Answ Sec DTE Only VF amp DTE VF w DTE Answer Access Security Mode This configuration option is read only and cannot be changed from the Configure branch The setting of this configuration option can only be changed in the Set Answer Sec group found in the Security branch The settings of this configuration option determine the type of access security protection provided by the modem It can be disabled using the No Answ Sec setting or it can be enabled with the DTE Only VF amp DTE or VF w DTE settings Originate Secur No OrigSec Nxt No OrigSec Ena Orig Sec Originate Security Mode This configuration option is read only and cannot be changed from the Configure branch The setting of this configuration option can only be changed in the S
73. the following values 0 Transmit or Receive 1 Transmit only 2 Receive only 3 Transmit and Receive Factory setting is 3 Configure Edit Line Dialer 82 V 32bis Autorate Leased Line Register determines if Autorating is used on leased lines when connected in V 32bis mode Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable Factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased Line 83 MI MIC Dialing Register determines if MI MIC control leads can be used to force the modem into the originate handshake after first dialing a call Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dialer S84 AT Command Mode Register determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands Register has the following values 0 Normal 1 No ERROR 2 No Strap or ERROR Factory setting is Normal Configure Edit DTE Dialer 85 Fast Disconnect Register allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dialer 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 25 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 11 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S88 Straps When Disconn
74. uec Rer D RE V 42 MNPIBUler reso eR RE DES Testis ne Ape anata eia Mte ster neq eveden Sedes Mis the hia eek awed seb eed PES NO Security Configuration Options 00 Overview After installing a 3800 Series modem its software configuration options must be set using either the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP or the AT command set This chapter describes how to access and use the Configure branch of the Top Level menu via the DCP The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is a Work space where you view and change any configuration options straps These configuration options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory e Active Operating is a configuration area containing configuration options currently used by the modem When the modem is powered on or when a save is performed the contents of Active Saved are loaded into Active Operating Any changes made using AT commands directly affect this configuration area e Active Saved is a read from and write to configuration option area containing the most recently saved changes made to any configuration options In the event of power loss or reset the modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile memory Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional read and write changeable configuration areas where you can create and store additional configur
75. with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance 8 A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 B COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASO
76. 0 amp Q1 and amp Q3 AT commands for Disable are amp M231 amp M236 amp Q231 and amp Q236 AT commands for V 25bis Async are amp M232 and amp Q232 AT commands for V 25bis Bisync are amp M233 and amp Q233 AT commands for V 25bis HDLC are amp M234 and amp Q234 AT commands for DTR Dirs dialing are amp M2 and amp Q2 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 15 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 2 2 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options AT Escape Char 043 ASCI Nxt 1 043 ASCI AT Escape Character The escape sequence allows you to move back and forth between Command mode and Data mode The ASCII value of the escape character 43 ASCII can be set to any ASCII value from 1 ASCII to 255 ASCII However the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCII is entered When disabled the call must be disconnected to return to Command mode The factory default is 43 ASCII AT escape character AT command is S register S2 n where n is a value from 1 to 127 AT command to disable is S register S2 n where n is a value from 128 to 255 When disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode unless disconnected Escape GuardTim 1sec Nxt disec 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec Escape Guard Time Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters T
77. 1 Calling Tone during call origination Disable No RJ11 support or ETC 1 1 Calling Tone Enable For use when the Cellular Mobile factory template is loaded enable RJ11 support and ETC 1 1 Calling Tone AT Command to Disable is S register S93 0 AT Command to Enable is S register S93 1 This configuration option only appears if the 6700 Series NMS option is installed 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 45 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Security Configuration Table 9 9 shows each Security configuration option as j y g it appears on the LCD The factory default value is shown Options after the colon on the first line all available selections are listed on the second line After this a description of the each selection follows These configuration options do not have an equivalent AT command The Security Configuration Options group allows you to view and set dial access security parameters This group appears only if the dial access security feature has been installed Table 9 9 1 of 2 Security Configuration Options EntryWait_Time 20 sec Nxt 20sec 10sec 40sec 60sec Entry Wait Timeout Determines how long the answering modem waits for the originating modem to enter a VF side password and DTE side password This timer resets for each phase of access security For example if a VF side password and a DTE side password are required then the user has 20 seconds per entry to input the correct pas
78. 10 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 23 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 3 5 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options Auto Make Busy Disable Nxt Disable Enable Automatic Make Busy Forces the modem to go off hook under the following conditions a local analog loopback is performed a self test is performed or if the modem is switched to the service line This option is only valid with the Model 3811 and does not appear on the Model 3810 s or Model 3820 s LCD NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX The Make Busy Network Interface Module NIM must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S40 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable MakeBusyViaDTR Disable Nxt Disable Enable Make Busy Via DTR Determines if the modem goes off hook when DTR is Off Enable this setting if the DTE normally keeps DTR ON and turns DTR Off when the DTE cannot accept a call NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX For 3811 modems the MakeBusy Network Interface Modules NIMs must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The factory default is Disable AT command is
79. 11 installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier from normal dial or leased line operation to service line operation This switch only places the modem on the service line For a connection to be established you must still use the normal dialing methods as described in Chapter 5 Call Setup Branch A service line is an extra dial line connected to a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier This line is normally shared by up to eight Model 3811 modems installed in either Slots 1 8 or Slots 9 16 However by daisy chaining the service line connector of one Network Interface Module NIM to the service line of another NIM installed in the same carrier you can permit all 16 modems to share one service line The service line can also be extended to other carriers in a cabinet For more information regarding daisy chaining of modems to the service line refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual A service line is ideal for a dial backup of Model 3811 modems operating on leased lines Remember that a service line can back up only one failed leased line at a time To enable service line from the Control branch make the following selections Control A Service Line Press the gt key until Service Line appears Select Service Line to switch the modem from its normal dial line to the service line Now when the modem places a call instead of using the dial or leased line the call is placed on the service line To
80. 13 14 15 Leased Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over leased lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to 15 dBm The factory default is 0 dBm AT command is S register S45 n where nis a value from 0 to 15 corresponding from 0 dBm to 15 dBm 1800HzTrainTone Disable Nxt Disable Enable 1800 Hz Training Tone This configuration option is for communicating with certain modems that do not comply with the V 32 standard When 1800 Hz Training Tone is enabled a short burst of 1800 Hz AC tone is sent to the answering modem to prompt it to answer This is not required for V 32 compliant modems The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S34 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 9 30 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 5 3 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options BdLn Auto Orig Disable Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup 2 min 5 min 10 min Bad Lines Auto Originate Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail This configuration option must be enabled in both the local and remote modem The Answer mode modem must have its Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto Answer Disable The modem will not perform a Bad
81. 23 No Answer Timeout 9 21 No Answer Timeout S7 14 16 No Carrier Disconnect 9 23 No Carrier Disconnect S10 14 17 No Data Disconnect 9 23 No Data Disconnect Timer VT 14 13 No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal 9 23 No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal S80 14 25 Nxt DCP option 9 6 Online mode 14 5 operating modes 14 1 options 1 2 Options Status branch 7 5 Originate Access security 12 2 Originate Security 9 47 12 9 Parity Bit 9 9 password Administrative 12 5 12 10 Answer Access 12 11 combination 12 3 database 12 12 DTE side 12 3 entry 12 11 examples 12 12 number of DTE password tries 9 46 Originate Access 12 12 Remote Access 14 22 remote access 9 43 Table 12 6 Type 12 7 VF side 12 2 Password Table 12 6 Pattern Test branch 8 6 Pause Time for dial modifier 9 21 Pause Time for Dial Modifier S8 14 17 PBX C 3 pin assignments E 1 power up procedure 2 8 primary channel 11 2 Rate Auto Originate 9 32 Rate Auto Originate S36 14 18 Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay 9 39 Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay S39 14 19 Receive Remote Loopback 9 40 Record Status branch 7 5 redialing automatic 9 19 9 24 9 32 14 19 Remote Access Password 9 43 Remote Access Password S56 S59 14 22 Remote branch 11 1 Remote Digital Loop 8 4 Remote Mode Indicator 4 6 remote modem Top Level menu 11 3 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Index Repeat Las
82. 232 is the factory default For UNIX Dial WinkWhenbDisc is the factory default AT command for Forced On is amp CO AT command for Standard RS232 is amp C1 AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp C2 AT command for Follows DTR is amp C3 AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp C4 AT command for DTR Disconnect Off is amp C5 AT command for BridgeRetrain is amp C6 TX Clock Source Internal Nxt Internal External RXC Loop Transmit Clock Source Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the DTE Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock and output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 EXT on the EIA 232 D interface Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received signal and is output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface NOTE This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Sync The factory default is Internal AT command for Internal is amp X0 AT command for External is amp X1 AT command for RXC Loop is amp X2 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 13 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 1 7 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options CT111_Rate Cnil Disable Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2 CT111 Rate Control Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pi
83. 2400 bps CCITT V 22 1200 bps CCITT V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps Bell 103J 300 bps LEASED LINE MODULATIONS V 32terbo 19 200 16 800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps CCITT V 22bis 2400 bps FAX MODULATIONS Optional CCITT V 17 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 bps CCITT V 29 9600 7200 bps CCITT V 27 ter 4800 2400 bps ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Shock and Vibration Storage Temperature 32 F 0 C to 122 F 50 C 5 to 90 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping 4 F 20 C to 158 F 70 C DTE INTERFACE 25 pin D subminiature connector 25 pin D subminiature connector EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 RS 366 A Model 3811 only AC POWER REQUIREMENTS 115 Vac 10 60 Hz POWER CONSUMPTION Model 3810 and Model 3820 Model 3811 5 25 watts typical including power transformer speaker off 4 25 watts typical each card Speaker consumption is approximately 1 watt at high volume D 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Technical Specifications Table D 1 3 of 4 Technical Specifications for 3800 Series Modems Specifications Description DIMENSIONS Weight Height Width Depth 2 5 pounds 1 14 kg Model 3810 and Model 3820 not including power transformer 1 0 pounds 0 45 kg Model 3811 2 1 inches 5 4 cm Model 3810 and Model 3820 7 1 inches 18 1 cm M
84. 27ter CCITT V 29 CCITT V 32 CCITT V 32bis CCITT V 42 CCITT V 42bis CCITT V 54 character character echo circuit pack lock Class 1 fax Class 2 fax command line Command mode configuration area configuration option A fax communications standard for modems operating half duplex with synchronous data at 14 400 bps A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 1200 bps over the dial network PSTN A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 1200 or 2400 bps over the dial network PSTN A fax communications standard for modems operating half duplex with synchronous data at 2400 and 4800 bps A fax communications standard for modems operating half duplex with synchronous data at 7200 and 9600 bps A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 4800 or 9600 bps on switched dial or leased telephone lines A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over dial networks PSTN or leased lines at 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 or 4800 bps CCITT standard for error control protocol CCITT standard for data compression CCITT standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests A letter figure number punctuation or other symbols A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by sending displaying all the characters being transmitted to the monitor
85. 6 Dial TX Level Permissv 9 Nxt Permissv 9 Programmable 10dBm 11dBm 12dBm 13dBm 14dBm 15dBm 16 dBm 17 dBm 18dBm 19dBm 20dBm 21dBm 22dBm 23dBm 24dBm 25dBm 26 dBm 27dBm 28 dBm 29dBm 30dBm 31dBm 32dBm ETC 1 0 Cell ETC 1 1 Cell Dial Transmit Level Sets the power output level of the transmit signal over dial lines Permissive 9 dBm The modem transmits data at approximately 9 dBm This is true whether the modem is connected to an RJ11 type permissive jack or to an RJ41 or RJ45 programmable jack Programmable The modem transmits at a predetermined level set by programming a resistor in the RJ41 or RJ45 jack The program resistor value is only read upon power up or after reset ETC 1 0 Cell Transmit level is automatically adjusted in response to line conditions according to the proprietary Enhanced Throughput Cellular 1 0 specification Use only with remote modems set to ETC 1 0 Cell and limit the data rate to 4800 bps ETC 1 1 Cell Transmit level is automatically adjusted in response to line conditions according to the proprietary Enhanced Throughput Cellular 1 1 specification The factory default is Permissv 9 AT command for Permissive mode is amp JO AT command for Programmable mode is amp J1 AT commands for 10 through 32 dBm are amp I10 through amp I32 AT command for ETC 1 0 Cell is amp I99 AT command for ETC 1 1 Cell is amp I100 V22b Guard Tone Disable N
86. 6 9 37 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 6 5 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Break Buffr Ctl Keep_Data Nxt Keep Data Discard_Data Break Buffer Control Determines if data stored in the modem s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a break sequence Keep Data Nondestructive mode Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems Discard Data Destructive mode Empties the data buffer Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break are discarded The factory default is Keep Data NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option see DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled AT commands for Discard Data are KO and K1 AT commands for Keep Data are K2 K3 K4 and K5 Send Break Cntl Data First Nxt Data First Break First Send Break Control Determines what is sent from the modem first data or break if a break sequence is sent from the DTE Data First Nonexpedited A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received This is also known as Nonexpedited mode Break First Expedited A break is sent before the data currently in the buffer This is also known as Expedited mode The factory default is Data First NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option see DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled
87. 7 amp D DTR Action 9 10 14 7 amp F Factory Defaults 14 7 amp G V 22bis Guard Tone 9 27 14 8 amp I Dial Transmit Level 9 27 14 9 amp J Dial Transmit Type 9 27 14 9 amp L Leased Mode 9 29 14 9 amp M Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type 9 8 9 15 14 10 amp Q Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type 9 8 9 15 14 10 amp R RTS Action 9 11 14 10 amp S DSR Control 9 11 14 10 amp T Test 14 11 amp TO Abort Test 8 2 amp T1 Local Analog Loopback 8 3 amp T2 Pattern Test 8 7 amp T3 Local Digital Loopback 8 5 amp T4 amp T5 Receive Remote Loopback Response 9 40 amp T6 Remote Digital Loopback 8 4 amp T9 Self Test 8 2 amp V View Configuration Options 14 11 amp W Save to Memory 14 11 amp X Transmit Clock Source 9 13 14 11 amp Z Store Telephone Numbers 5 6 14 11 A Error Control Fallback Character 9 36 14 13 B Modulation Data Rate 14 13 14 14 14 16 C MNP5 Compression 9 35 14 14 R Sets DTE Rate 14 14 A Maximum Frame Size 9 39 14 12 C Error Control Negotiate Buffer 9 36 14 12 D CTS Control 9 12 14 12 G Modem to Modem Flow Control 9 37 14 12 K Break Buffer Control Send Break Control Break Forces Escape 9 16 9 38 14 12 N Error Control Mode 9 35 14 12 Q Flow Control of DTE Flow Control of Modem 9 36 9 37 14 13 T No Data Disconnect Timer 9 23 14 13 X XON XOFF Passthrough 9 37 14 13 A Answer Mode
88. AT commands for Break First are WO V1 K2 and K3 AT commands for Data First are K4 and K5 TXBuffDiscDelay 10sec Nxt 10sec 60sec Disable The Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay is the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send data in its Transmit Buffer to the remote modem after it is commanded by the DTE to disconnect Disable means that the disconnect occurs immediately The default is 10 seconds Disable Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers 10 60 sec Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting In both cases 10 sec and 60 sec the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers NOTE This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for DirectMode AT command is S register S49 n where n is 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 9 38 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 6 6 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options RxBuffDiscDelay Disable Nxt Osec 60sec Disable Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send data in its Receive Buffer to the DTE after the modem is com
89. Contrl Mode configuration option for more about Direct mode On leased lines V 42 error control and Buffer mode are only supported by V 32bis An error occurs if the modem is not in Direct mode when the modulation is changed from V 32bis In asynchronous mode using V 22bis the DTE rate must equal the leased line rate 2400 V 22bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire and 4 wire leased lines NOTE It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate The factory default is 19200 V32t AT command is S register S44 n where nis 0 1 14 400 bps V 32bis 5 4800 bps V 32bis 2 12 000 bps V 32bis 6 2400 bps V 22bis 3 9600 bps V 32bis 18 19 200 V 32terbo default 4 7200 bps V 32bis 19 16 800 V 32terbo 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 29 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 5 2 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable V 32bis Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 14 400 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis connections The factory default is Enable AT command for V 32bis Autorate is S register S82 n where nis 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable Leased TX Level 0 Nxt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
90. DCPs of the Model 3810 and Model 3820 modems Figures 4 1 and 4 2 contain status indicators pushbutton type keys and an LCD 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems ei Je RTS CTS TXD LSD RXD SQ COMSPHERE 3820 O OO 0 0 0 105 106 103 109 104 496 13068 02 Figure 4 1 Model 3810 DCP ei Je 0B 8 E85 amp PWR ALRM DIAG DTR RTS CTS TXD LSD RXD SQ TEST RATE COMSPHERE 3810 Oo 0000000 0 0 0 0 108 105 106 103 109 104 142 496 13067 02 Figure 4 2 Model 3820 DCP 4 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation Model 3811 Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel The SDCP is used to manage carrier mounted Model 3811 modems Use the SDCP to issue commands to view and select configuration options on or monitor tests for a specific Model 3811 modem Status Status ok Pwr B Alm ll Alm Diag O In 1420 Test Diag O Out O Dial 12350 Al Q Busy O sev Osa Front Panel O SDU 3811 The faceplate of the Model 3811 contains LED status indicators that monitor the operation of the modem After the SDCP is connected to the modem the Front Panel indicator of the selected modem lights to show that the modem is connected Figure 4 3 shows the SDCP and the Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU it interfaces with CARRIER SLOTS 1 16 COMSPHERE 3000 J 496
91. Delay 9 38 14 21 S51 DTE Remote Loopback 9 40 14 21 52 DTE Local Loopback 9 40 14 21 53 V 54 Address 9 41 14 22 S54 V 54 Device Type 9 41 14 22 S55 Access from Remote 9 43 14 22 S 56 S59 Remote Access Password 9 43 14 22 S61 CT111 Rate Control 9 14 14 22 S62 V 25bis Coding 9 18 14 23 S63 V 25bis Idle Character 9 18 14 23 S64 V 25bis New Line Character 9 19 14 23 S65 Line Current Disconnect 9 22 14 23 S66 NMS Call Messages 9 44 14 23 S67 Directory Location 1 Callback 9 43 14 23 S69 Make Busy Via DTR 9 24 14 24 S74 Network Position Identifier 9 45 14 24 75 Network Management Address 9 44 14 24 S76 V 32bis Autorate 9 27 14 24 S77 DTR Alarm Reporting 9 44 14 24 S78 V 32bis Automode 9 26 14 24 S80 No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal 9 23 14 25 S82 V 32bis Autorate 9 30 14 25 S83 MI MIC Dialing 9 25 14 25 S84 AT Command Mode 9 18 14 25 S85 Fast Disconnect 9 22 14 25 S88 Straps When Disconnected 9 42 14 26 S89 V 42 ARQ Window Size Increase 14 26 S90 DTE Rate VF Rate 9 14 14 26 S91 Cellular Enhancements 9 39 14 26 93 Cellular RJ11 Adapt 9 45 14 26 save configuration options 14 11 telephone numbers 14 11 SDCP Shared Diagnostic Control Panel 3 1 SDU Shared Diagnostic Unit 3 1 secondary channel 11 2 Security branch 12 4 Security configuration options 9 46 security messages 4 12 Self Test branch 8 2 se
92. Dial LineRate 19200 V32t Nxt 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A 0 300 V21 0 300 103J Dial Line Rate This configuration option determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation at the data rate selected The modem can be forced by the remote modem to a lower data rate 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected 0 300 V21 0 300 103J Modem operates in full duplex Asynchronous mode These data rates do not support V 42 or MNP error control The factory default is 19200 V32t AT command for Dial Line Rate is S register S41 n where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 7 1200 V 22 2 12 000 V 32bis 8 1200 212A 3 9600 V 32bis V 32 10 0 300 V21 4 7200 V 32bis 11 0 300 103J 5 4800 V 32bis V 32 20 19 200 V 32terbo default 6 2400 V 22bis 21 16 800 V 32terbo V32bis Automode Enable Nxt Enable Disable System 85 Enable The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem However the maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration op
93. E Connection Use the following procedures to connect the EIA 232 D cable and ferrite choke from the modem to the DTE 1 Make sure the modem s rear panel power switch is Off 2 Connect the DB 25 P male connector on the cable to the DB 25 S female connector labeled DTE Figures 2 2 and 2 3 on the modem s rear panel Use a small screwdriver to tighten the cable to the modem 3 Connect the DB 25 P connector on the cable to the DB 25 S connector on the DTE Use a small screwdriver to tighten the cable to the DTE PHONE LEASED LEASED 3810 3820 PWR 8 POSITION Ill 8 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR LEASED LINE NETWORK OPERATION CONNECTS WITH JM8 TYPE JACK 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR TELEPHONE SET DTE s 0000000000000 o o 492 13070 01 8 POSITION 8 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR PROGRAMMABLE DIAL NETWORK OPERATION CONNECTS WITH RJ45S TYPE JACK 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR PERMISSIVE DIAL NETWORK OPERATION CONNECTS WITH RJ11C TYPE JACK CAUTION Pins 3 and 6 of the modem s 8 position dial jack are reserved for MI MIC dialing To avoid equipment damage and violation of FCC Part 68 Rules do not connect a 6 position 4 conductor cable to a USOC RJ14C jack This jack has a secondary dial line on Pins 2 and 5 In this case a 2 conductor cable using Pins 3 and 4 of
94. Edit Sets the rate at which data is passed between the modem and the DTE DTE Interface R must be the last command on the command line Setting the DTE rate with the R command does not turn off autobauding R115200 Sets the DTE rate to 115 200 bps R76800 Sets the DTE rate to 76 800 bps R57600 Sets the DTE rate to 57 600 bps R38400 Sets the DTE rate to 38 400 bps R19200 Sets the DTE rate to 19 200 bps R14400 Sets the DTE rate to 14 400 bps 96 R9600 Sets the DTE rate to 9600 bps R7200 Sets the DTE rate to 7200 bps R4800 Sets the DTE rate to 4800 bps R2400 Sets the DTE rate to 2400 bps R1200 Sets the DTE rate to 1200 bps R300 Sets the DTE rate to 300 bps Hn V 42bis Data Compression Configure Edit HO Disable V42 MNP Buffer H1 Transmit only H2 Receive only H3 Transmit and Receive 14 14 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers S Register List S registers affect the operating parameters of the 3800 Series modems S registers are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT See amp Mn command Table 14 2 lists all S registers supported by the 3800 Series modems The first column lists the S register The second column lists all possible values for that register The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent from the front panel Use this column to reference commands in Chapter 9 if further description is
95. IS bac beer I ERE d nds 8 2 9 Configure Branch ei C 9 1 Configure Bracie se cee cipue cet eot Po e EROR CE I Red 9 4 Configuration Tables ius setae cue ed detect a ees ERE ERES 9 7 Security Configuration OpHOnS sece aciere rk ex ep 9 46 10 Control Branch ci AL 10 1 Control Brame ei anc srenti araar oe RreRbh E a8 Oe heb Aen 10 1 Automatic Firmware Download 0 0 00 cece eee ee eee ers 10 6 11 Remote Branch OV GIVI Walser eec eC pee eee aco pt dee y ees 11 1 Remote Branch orbe erbe me e ARR 11 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Table of Contents 12 Security Dc MM CE 12 1 Secunty Branch zz ecoseecreeez key Geko E PE MERE ES EERES 12 4 Security Password Entry Techniques 0005 12 11 Database Table Examples ee Re ER UIROS PEE ROS 12 12 13 Fax Operation OVGEVIGW o oos disdain titel beet PRO dade 13 1 Pax Operablobu oops eae teer ete hd eet dedi ae doe 13 1 14 AT Command Set and S Registers c ET 14 1 Operating Modes ceri ie esa kod inete i une edad ee dha Soave EEE 14 1 Command Guidelines 3 5 bo cG bk Gee RES oooh ee dae dnd 14 2 AY Command List Sors eas rS rege sae kha ww ee ees 14 2 S Resister LISh c i sore eset due gas de Sus hac etu dus cede SRA qe 14 15 Appendices Be Momm ree te 2 iain Cree eu ve tq Uu asp dues A 1 B JResultCOU8S Cuiere ori Deon eN ESATE EENET EET B 1 C Troubleshooting 2 i3 2 3 4 ci5 044i E EEE EEEE ET C 1 D Technical Specifications sss sers sobs a
96. Interface Hl Async Sync Mode Async DTE Rate Data Bits Parity Bit 5 top Bits TR Action SR Control TS Action TS Control TS CTS Delay LSD Control TX Clock Source TII Rate Cntl TE Rate VF 2000209 0 Q o DTE Dialer Mil DTE Dialer Type AT Escape Char Escape GuardTim BreakF orceEscap CommandCharEcho CarriageRtn Char Backspace Char Linefeed Char Result Codes ExtendResltCode ResultCode Form AT Cmnd Mode V25bis Coding V25bis IdleF ill V 25b NewLineChr DTR Cont Repeat Line Dialer Mil AutoAnswerR ing Dialer Type DialTone Detect Blind Dial Paus BusyTone Detect Pause Time NoAnswer Timout Fast Disconnect Line Crt Disc Long Space Disc No Carrier Disc No Data Disc Auto Make Busy akeBusyViaDTR DTR Auto Redial I MIC Dialing Dial Line Mi Dial Line Rate 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A 0 300 V21 0 300 103J V32bis Automode V32bis Autorate Dial TX Level V22b Guard Tone V32bis Train FallF wdDelay 495 14436a 01 A 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Menu Tree from previous page Activ Operating from previous page Ld EditArea frm to next page Customer2 Factory Customer1 tul cus Active Saved Async Dial Sync Leased Cellular Mobile Sync Dial UNIX Dial Cellular PSTN Choose Function Edit Save Choose Mode o Answer Originate L
97. L1 2 wire originate leased line operation amp L2 4 wire originate leased line operation Model 3810 and 3811 only amp L3 2 wire answer leased line operation amp L4 4 wire answer leased line operation Model 3810 and 3811 only The amp L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting Leased Line mode Therefore it must be entered as the last command in an initialization string 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 9 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 1 8 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT sae Front Panel Command Description Branch amp Mn Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type Configure Edit DTE and amp Qn amo amp Q0 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode and uses Dialer AT Command protocol amp M1 amp Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol amp M2 amp Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone number stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns Off and then ON amp M3 amp Q3 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol amp Q4 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol Hayes AutoSync is enabled amp M231 amp Q231 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode the DTE Dialer Type is disabled amp M232 amp Q232 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode V 25bis Async dialing is enabled amp M233 amp Q233 Modem operates in Synchronous mode V 25bis Bisync dialing is enabled
98. LCD AND KEY STATUS INDICATORS PAD AC TRANSFORMER A ae EIA 232 D ger OE INTERFACE E NMS DIAL LEASED 3820 PHONE LEASED 3810 AC POWER IN ON OFF 496 13096 02 Figure 2 1 Model 3810 and 3820 3800 Series Modem Package After opening the modem s package check for damage and verify that the following items are present e Manual and reference card e Model 3810 or Model 3820 modem e Power transformer e One 6 position 4 wire modular cord Model 3810 and Model 3820 e One 8 position 8 wire modular cord Model 3810 only e One ferrite choke and cable tie e Fax software and documentation if fax option installed If any hardware components are damaged notify your sales or service representative Refer to page A in the front of this document for contact information 2 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3810 and 3820 Installation Customer Supplied Equipment The following customer supplied equipment is required to complete a data communications system using either the Model 3810 or Model 3820 modem e A DTE with an available EIA 232 D serial port e A standard EIA 232 D male to female cable with a male DB 25 S connector at one end to attach to the modem e One of the following modular dial or leased network interfaces RJA5S for dial programmable applications RJIIC for dial permissive applications An 8 position to 6 position crossover cable for JM8 leased line
99. Lines Auto Originate Enable The modem will originate a call after 30 seconds of continuous bad line conditions FastBackup The modem will originate a call after 20 seconds of continuous bad line conditions 2 min The modem will originate a call after 2 minutes of continuous bad line conditions 5 min The modem will originate a call after 5 minutes of continuous bad line conditions 10 min The modem will originate a call after 10 minutes of continuous bad line conditions This configuration option is not available on the Model 3820 The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S46 n S46 0 Disable S46 1 30 Seconds S46 2 20 Seconds S46 3 60 Seconds S46 4 90 Seconds S46 5 120 Seconds S46 21 600 Seconds Note that the effect of S46 2 is out of sequence with the other values 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 31 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 5 4 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options Rate Auto Orig Disable Nxt Disable OnFIBkTo48 OnFIBkTo72 OnFIBkTo96 OnFIBkTo120 OnFIBKTo144 OnFIBKTo168 Rate Auto Originate Initiates a dial backup call using the phone number in directory location 1 when the leased line rate of the modem falls back to or below a certain speed Disable The modem will not perform a Rate Auto Originate OnFIBkT048 If the leased line rate of the modem falls back to 4800 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated OnFIBkTo72 If the leased l
100. Mode Fail No Circuit Press the amp key to return to the Top Level menu and dial again Select Channel gt A Secondary CA Gc B 8 amp or Select Channel lt ZN Prim data blckd A Gc M 5 Cm If operation over the secondary channel is desired press any function key to select the secondary channel Secondary channel only appears if using V 32bis or V 32 modulation If operation over the primary channel is desired press the gt key until Prim appears and press any function key 11 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Remote Branch Online 19 2 n A eu Ee ze ja fe lel es m If the remote modem accepts the password and the entry is successful the Top Level menu of the remote modem Figure 11 1 appears on the local modem s LCD An D appears in the upper right hand corner indicating that what is displayed on your LCD is actually the Top Level menu of the remote 3800 Series modem The Top Level menu of the remote 3800 Series modem is similar to the local 3800 Series modem with the following exceptions e The Talk Data branch does not appear e Change Directory is the only function available under the Call Setup branch e Self and Local Analog Loop do not appear under the Test branch when using the secondary channel When using the primary channel the Test branch does not appear e Exit Remote replaces Remote on t
101. NABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THIS CLASS A DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE DE LA CLASSE A RESPECTE TOUTES LES EXIGENCES DU REGLEMENT SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR DU CANADA The following warning applies to all Model 3811 modems WARNING THE MODEL 3811 IS PROVIDED WITH A REPLACEABLE LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACE THE BATTERY ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS LE MODELE 3811 EST FOURNI AVEC UNE PILE AU LITHIUM REMPLACABLE REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MEME TYPE OU D UN TYPE RECOMMANDE PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES USAGEES CONFORMEMENT AU
102. NOTE These configuration options are not changed by loading factory default configuration options Model 3811 default setting November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Equipment List Equipment Feature Part Number Model 3810 115V 3810 A1 001 Model 3810 220 240V 3810 A1 301 Model 3811 3811 B1 001 Model 3820 115V 3820 A1 001 Model 3820 220 240V 3820 A1 301 Fax Option 3800 C1 008 6 position 4 wire modular cord 7 foot length 125 0067 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 14 foot length 125 0053 1431 8 position to 6 position JM8 to RJ11 crossover modular cord 125 0054 1531 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Active Operating Active Saved analog loop analog signal Answer mode ASCII Async Dial asynchronous transmission AT command set AT prefix autobaud automatic answer Glossary A configuration area containing configuration options currently in use by the modem When a power cycle occurs a reset is performed or a save is issued using the DCP this area is updated with the contents of Active Saved A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration options Any changes made to configuration options can be saved using either the DCP s Save command or by issuing an AT amp WO command See local analog loop A signal such as a voice that varies continuously The modem is in a state whe
103. Password Table group consists of the following options Select Index Password Type Edit Password and Save Edit To access EditPasswdTable from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Set Access Ctrl A Edit PassWd Table cm BM j Select EditPassW dTable e Select Index Select Index allows a specific record to be retrieved Index addresses range from 0001 to 0020 for the Model 3810 and Model 3820 and from 0001 to 3000 for the Model 3811 The contents of this record can be viewed edited and saved To access Select Index make the following selections Set Access Ctrl gt Edit PassWd Table A CA ay Ml Select EditPassWdTable Select Index A Ent t0001 A G 7 l2 85 Cm Select Index appears Press the F2 1 key to increment index values Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the desired index appears and then press Ent If an index outside of the range is entered the message Index Too Big appears Choose an index from the database s current index range After selecting an index the Edit Password Table group s options Password Type Edit Password and Save Edit appear in a series of LCD displays Keep the following in mind when scrolling down Edit Password Table The current function and index are displayed on the LCD s top line e The LCD s bottom line
104. Ring 2 Wire Leased Line Dial Ring 5 Phone Tip Dial Tip Phone Tip 2 Wire Leased Line Dial Tip 6 Mode Indication Common Mode Indication Common 7 4 Wire Receive Leased Line Program Resistor Program Resistor 8 4 Wire Receive Leased Line Program Resistor Common Program Resistor Common Table E 4 VF Connector Pin Assignments TELCO Jacks Pin RJ RJ41S RJ45S JM8 bubo 1 Not Used Ring Fixed Loss Loop Not Used Ring 1 Not Used 2 Not Used Tip Fixed Loss Loop Not Used Tip 1 Not Used 3 Not Used Mode Indication Mode Indication Loopback Indication Tip 1 4 Ring Ring Programmed Ring Programmed Not Used Ring 5 Tip Tip Programmed Tip Programmed Not Used Tip 6 Not Used Mode Indication Common Mode Indication Common Loopback Indication Ring 1 7 Not Used Program Resistor Program Resistor Tip Not Used 8 Not Used Program Resistor Common Program Resistor Common Ring Not Used 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 E 5 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response ll PCT F 1 oui dironim c CCP F 2 Call Request with Number Provided CRN 4 eh t rentem p hme F 2 Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS 0 0 0 cece cece eee eee F 2 a NEN JO M PR rx Sis ho Redonda ithe Sa DL F 2 Call Failure Mdication CED ue eniiee4Reswec e RePPpeSsUGGa eer qe eR aeree s F 2 Call Connecting CNX serisi renean kea S o RRe pU eee ERROR AE a edie cece F 2 Cal Answer Command ER F 3 Tnconung Call ING
105. S Si te re nin o etra at oec er pcena Rel spia eaae arto neer dae 14 1 Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode 00 eee e eee ee eeee 14 1 Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time isc cde er RO RES CIR ES OE TRE e RH 14 1 Command Guide thes 252 oce e Go Se Ee bebe nte dote mee Ry ER siti a a pae 14 2 Ar Command 8b espe dc eR Eee ere eda a eek diit Sates Sond gece les 14 2 AT Command Format s sepie oc dc ee eae ees ath FFs E HERS RAF Eee RHET Ete ENS 14 3 SREE ET LISE MD E 14 15 o Recister FOINA open codice tior A Gated N d abe ud oio A OA R ua x 14 15 Overview The AT command set provides an alternative method to the front panel for entering commands that control the operation and configuration of the 3800 Series modems This chapter discusses guidelines necessary to operate AT commands as well as listing the modifiers for all AT commands supported by the 3800 Series modems AT commands are issued from asynchronous DTEs such as a personal computer Operating Modes The 3800 Series modem has two operating modes Command mode and Data mode Before a modem goes online establishes a successful connection with a remote modem it is considered to be in Command mode an idle state where you can modify its operating parameters or issue modem commands In Command mode any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either words or digits known as a result code Refer to Table B 1 for a listing of result co
106. S register S69 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DTR Auto Redial Nxt Dir1 Dirs1 2 Dirs 1 3 Dirs 1 4 Dirs 1 5 Dirs1 6 Dirs1 7 Dirs1 8 Dirs 1 9 Dirs 1 10 DTR Auto Redial Defines the number of directory locations the modem may access when prior dialing attempts fail For example the selection Dirs1 10 means that all ten directory locations may be tied The default is directory location 1 only DTR Auto Redial represents the same internal setting as that accessed with the Auto Redial configuration option in the Leased Line group However DTR Auto Redial is in effect and can be accessed only if the DTE Dialer Type is DTR Dirs Dir 1 The modem will use only Directory Location 1 for automatic dial backups Dirs 1 2 The modem will use Directory Location 2 in the event of call failure using Directory Location 1 Dirs 1 3 The modem will use Directory Location 3 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries Dirs 1 10 The modem will use Directory Location 10 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries AT command is S register S37 n S37 0 Use Directory Location 1 S37 1 Use Directory Locations 1 2 S37 2 Use Directory Locations 1 3 S37 3 Use Directory Locations 1 4 S37 9 Use Directory Locations 1 10 9 24 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 3 6 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options MI MIC Dialing Disable End Disable Enable MI MIC Di
107. S366A call originate is used in synchronous dial out applications where V 25bis dialing is not supported This function applies to Model 3811 modems only The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds To access RS366A from the Status branch make the following selections e A a a fre 5 Sq Status A DTE Press the key until RS366A appears Select RS366A CRQ DLO DPR d A E u um A 5 L2 L5 CJ The activity and state of the modem s DTE signal appear on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll other signals into view The LCD s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead The first symbol indicates the signal s activity during the sampling interval An asterisk indicates at least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions since the last update The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time A B block indicates a Space or ON condition while an underscore _ indicates a Mark or Off condition To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent There is no AT command for RS366A status 7 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Status Branch Options The Options Status function displays all optional firmware features currently installed in the modem for e
108. This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable to start the modem from a known condition after every call This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change the modem s operation for their particular call Reload No AT Change This has the same effect as Reload except that it becomes impossible to change this configuration option with an AT command and the command buffer is cleared so that AT A Repeat Last Command has no effect NOTE If Reload or RelodNoATChg is selected the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code appears when these commands are issued AT amp FO Loads Async Dial into Active Operating AT amp F1 Loads Sync Dial into Active Operating AT amp F2 Loads Sync Leased Answer into Active Operating AT amp F3 Loads UNIX Dial into Active Operating AT amp F4 Loads Sync Leased Originate into Active Operating AT amp F5 Loads Cellular Mobile into Active Operating AT amp F6 Loads Cellular PSTN into Active Operating AT amp WO Write Active Operating to Active Saved AT amp W1 Write Active Operating to Customer 1 AT amp W2 Write Active Operating to Customer 2 AT amp Zn x Store directory numbers The factory default is No Change AT command for No Change is S88 0 or S88 231 AT command for Reload is S88 1 or S88 232 AT command for Reload with no AT Change is S88 2 or S88 233 Speaker Control OnUntilCarr NxtOn UntilCarr Off On S
109. VEE E E E E EEIE E 4 6 Menu Structure eccesso inas e ee Rex E PERO CITERER EEE EEEE EE SET quse keys 4 7 Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages 2 cece eect eee eee ences 4 8 Selecting Factory Configuration Options eclesie RR Ree eee RR m urere E e eas 4 13 Using the Diagnostic Control Panel 4i sage hes mel eo SRS OWE ANS VEG OD PCS 4 13 Using AT Commands c csnrr es Ee th ECCE ERPEVERDERPUBPRCLURI ER UR E Oh pla 4 13 Ove rview The LCD displays the result of any command initiated This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic control panel DCP of the 3800 Series modem It also describes how to select and use each branch of the Top Level menu tree Diagnostic Control Panels There are two types of DCPs the front panel on the standalone Model 3810 and Model 3820 modems and the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature used with a Model 3811 installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Both DCPs have a two line 32 character liquid crystal display LCD and keypad through which Top Level menu branches are accessed to perform the following e Initiate and disconnect dial operations e Check modem status e Set up configuration options e Initiate diagnostic tests e Access remote modems through the local modem s DCP using the DCP Most of these operations can be performed from an attached asynchronous DTE using the AT command set Models 3810 and 3820 Diagnostic Control Panels The
110. X INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT C November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Safety Instructions Government Requirements and Equipment Return United States Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections Notice to Users of the Public Switched Telephone Network This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment The label is located on the bottom of the Model 3810 and 3820 modems This label is located on the Model 3811 s circuit card assembly If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company Page A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes USOC associated with the services on which the equipment is to be connected The Ringer Equivalence REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to dete
111. a 6 position plug can be purchased from your local electronics store Figure 2 2 Model 3810 Rear Panel 2 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3810 and 3820 Installation To ensure compliance with FCC Part 15 Regulations a 2 Close the two halves around the cable and snap ferrite choke must be installed on the EIA 232 D interface the ferrite choke shut pressing down on the plastic cable latch to secure it 1 Open the ferrite choke and place it around the DTE cable as close as possible to the connector attached to the modem 3 Install a cable tie behind the ferrite choke to prevent it from sliding along the cable PHONE DIAL NMS DTE amp ee reme LIT PW LEASED LEASED 3810 3820 492 13071 01 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR 6 POSITION PERMISSIVE DIAL NETWORK OPERATION 4 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR TELEPHONE SET Figure 2 3 CONNECTS WITH RJ11C TYPE JACK OR 2 WIRE LEASED LINE NETWORK OPERATION CONNECTS WITH 6 POSITION CENTER PAIR LEASED JACK CAUTION Pins 3 and 6 of the modem s 8 position dial jack are reserved for MI MIC dialing To avoid equipment damage and violation of FCC Part 68 Rules do not connect a 6 position 4 conductor cable to a USOC RJ14C jack This jack has a secondary dial line on Pins 2 and 5 In this case a 2 conductor cable using Pins 3 and 4 of a 6 position plug can be purc
112. agnostic Control Panel Security Access NOTE This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of the DCP security access selections Use the DCP security access function to lock the DCP of any 3800 Series modem and prevent unwanted user access Two options are available for this function Grant and Deny Grant allows any branch of the Top Level menu to be accessed from the DCP Deny allows access only to the Status branch of the Top Level menu All 3800 Series modems are shipped from the factory with DCP access granted To access the Front Panel DCP Security Access function perform the following Press the A key three times Press the S key twice Press the key once Frnt Panl Acces A Grant Deny ness ay Le es Dep Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock DCP access Either selection results in a return to the Top Level menu 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 15 Call Setup Branch OVERVIEW dis chs ahead Sea a LG tee Cee aN See E aoe a wea eee REE See a caw eagles 5 1 Call Setup Branch oa ocak ck gtk oe ee SMR peed owed pga CSPI X RS ed tance bce md COP RR ES 5 2 jr DT 5 2 DTe Sinia e RC Em 5 3 PT A MM DP 5 3 Dial Staudbs Retuttito Dial 14 2212 epa vete eet idee e A leek ER UB EIP sade A aA 5 4 Change Directory 22 49 ec eee Rh REReISR EES RR UE OE HERS Sa RR OR DEES Ee Rake s 5 5 Entering Telephone Numbers an
113. aling Also known as D Lead signaling is required by some PBX systems older data phones and security callback systems It forces the modem into the originate handshake after first dialing a call Disable Modem ignores activity on the MI MIC contacts Enable When Pins 3 and 6 of the TELCO jack Models 3810 and 3820 are connected then disconnected the modem goes off hook and looks for the answer sequence from the remote modem If the sequence is detected the local modem will handshake and connect with the remote modem A 26 pin D Lead control connector is located on the rear of the 3000 Series Carrier This connector is used for MI MIC Dialing for Model 3811 modems The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S83 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 25 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Dial Line Table 9 4 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default The Dial Line configuration options are used to setting the default value if the modem is just being configure the modem for operation over dial lines installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 4 1 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options
114. alue if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 1 1 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options Async Sync Mode Async Nxt Async Sync Asynchronous Synchronous Mode Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous mode If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set for Sync then the modem operates in Async mode when offline For Async Dial and UNIX Dial Async is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased Sync is the factory default AT commands for Async Mode are amp MO amp M231 amp M232 amp M235 or amp QO AT commands for Sync Mode are amp M1 amp M2 amp M3 amp M233 amp M234 amp M236 or amp Q1 amp Q2 amp Q3 Async DTE Rate 19200 Nxt 19200 57600 38400 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0 300 76800 115200 Asynchronous DTE Data Rate Identifies the asynchronous DTE s operating rate to the modem Data rates from 115 200 bps to 300 bps are supported To originate calls in 76 800 bps Sun Workstation environments use either DCP dialing DTR dialing or handset dialing The modem does not support AT command dialing at this data rate
115. amp DTE and the originating caller does not first enter a VF side password VF w DTE Allows specification of related VF Side and DTE side password pairs In this configuration a DTE side password submitted must be a valid Password Table entry and must match the particular entry associated with the valid VF side password that was submitted The passwords are associated with each other by their index in the Password Table VF plus DTE passwords occupy odd numbered index locations their DTE Entry counterparts occupy the even numbered index locations that immediately follow So for example if a VF side password is entered that matches the entry in index location 11 the DTE side password subsequently entered must match the entry in index location 12 VF plus DTE passwords must be unique in a VF w DTE configuration An attached DTE in asynchronous operation is required for DTE side password entry Up to 10 password pairs are permitted On the 3811 modem this can be optionally increased with the Expanded Password Table feature which permits 1500 password pairs 12 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security Set Orig Sec Set Originate Security controls whether or not the modem can originate a call using AT commands when the dial access security feature is installed This method of outbound security only applies to modems originating a call To access Set_Orig_Sec from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections
116. amp M234 amp Q234 Modem operates in Synchronous mode V 25bis HDLC dialing is enabled amp M235 amp Q235 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode AT amp T Exclusive dialing is enabled amp M236 amp Q236 Modem operates in Synchronous mode the DTE Dialer Type is disabled The amp M2 amp Q2 amp M231 amp Q231 amp M236 and amp Q236 commands disable the use of AT commands and force the modem into Dumb mode The only way to gain control of the modem is the front panel amp Rn RTS Action Configure Edit DTE amp RO Standard RS232 Interface amp R1 Ignores RTS amp R2 Simulated Control Carrier amp Sn DSR Control Configure Edit DTE amp S0 Forced On Interface amp S1 Standard RS232 amp S2 Wink When Disconnect amp S3 Follows DTR amp S4 On Early amp S5 Delay to DTE amp S6 Dial Backup Toggle 14 10 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 1 9 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT Command Description Front Panel Branch amp In Tests amp TO amp T1 amp T2 amp T3 amp T4 amp T5 amp T6 amp T7 amp T8 amp T9 Abort Stops any test in progress Local Analog Loop Pattern Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test BERT Local Digital Loopback test Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option Remote Digital Loopback test Remote Digital Loopback with
117. and If the password is valid the user can dial out using this modem The following example illustrates the format for an Originate Access password TYPE ATD abc 123 T9 800555 1234 PRESS Enter Where ATD is the AT dial command string Percent is the start and stop AT command string interrupt character The password must be embedded in these characters abc123 is the 10 alphanumeric character originate passwords T is the Tone DTMF dial modifier Comma is the pause dial modifier 98005551234 is the phone number Originate Access Security is enabled or disabled by the Set Originate Security group Answer Access Security The other method of security which is the primary focus of this chapter is Answer Access Answer Access allows the answering modem to restrict entry to the host DTE by ensuring that originating remote modems and or users have been granted proper security access Access can be granted by using one of three techniques VF side password entry DTE side password entry or a combination of both VF Side Passwords VF side password entry occurs between modems prior to connecting Once the VF side password is entered no other user intervention is required since security negotiation is handled solely by the modems When the answering modem is configured for VF entry technique it goes off hook and transmits to the originating modem either a secondary dial tone or silence this choice depends on ho
118. and restart the test 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 C 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table C 4 Online Operation Symptom Action Data scrambled Verify that the character format data bits parity and stop bits is set to the same value in both modems Missing data during a transfer Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem and the DTE If using XON XOFF flow control verify that the modem s parity matches the DTE s parity Table C 5 Leased Line Operation Symptom Action Modems do not train up on leased lines Verify that the correct cabling is used for your application Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is configured for Originate mode Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme Verify that modems are configured for the appropriate leased line mode For example if you have a 4 wire leased line then the modems must be configured for 4 wire operation Modems are configured for dial backup but do not switch to dial lines if leased lines fail Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option enabled Table C 6 Dial Backup Operation Symptom Action Dial backup line is present but cannot connect Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is stored in directory location 1 Verify that one modem has the Auto Dia
119. any changes are made to configuration options the DCP allows you to save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas e The lt and keys move selections across the LCD e The function keys F1 F2 F3 select the LCD choice that appears above that function key 9 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Configuration Tables The modem s configuration options are arranged into eight groups based upon functionality DTE Interface Table 9 1 DTE Dialer Table 9 2 Line Dialer Table 9 3 Dial Line Table 9 4 Leased Line Table 9 5 V 42 MNP Buffer Table 9 6 Tests Table 9 7 and Misc Table 9 8 Throughout these tables two selections frequently appear on the LCD Enable and Disable Unless otherwise stated Enable selects a configuration option and makes it available for use Disable makes a configuration option unavailable for use The remainder of this chapter discusses each configuration options group in detail listing factory defaults definitions and AT command equivalents DTE Interface The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 and asynchronous character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data between the DTE and the modem Table 9 1 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default setting the default v
120. applications only The following customer supplied equipment is required for the installation of a Model 3811 modem e A COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier e A male to female 50 pin mass termination cable One Network Interface Module NIM for modems installed in Slots 1 8 and one NIM for modems installed in Slots 9 16 required for dial line applications e One of the following modular or 50 pin dial or leased network interfaces RJIIC for single line dial permissive applications RJA45S for single line dial programmable applications RJ21X for multiple line dial permissive applications RJ27X for multiple line programmable applications 66 punchdown block or other demarcation device e One 6 position to 6 position modular cord required for network management applications e A Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU required for network management applications If the modem is to be managed by a network management system a Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU must be supplied and properly connected to the network management controller For proper network management connection to the SDU refer to the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System User s Guide For installation of the 3000 Series Carrier into a cabinet refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Model 3810 or Model 3820 Modem Installation Before installing your standalone modem make sure your installation site is clean an
121. as been established perform the following procedure Via your asynchronous DTE inform the remote user that you wish to talk and will be placing the modems into Talk mode Both users should perform the following 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the key until Tlk Data is displayed 3 Select Tlk Data The telephones are now connected and you are able to talk to the remote user When you finish your conversation and return to Data mode both of you must select Tlk Data 4 Place the handset on to the cradle 6 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Status Branch iO coy 2 APERTURE 7 1 SIRE ETT 116 E EEE ERO E N E A T EE E E EE EE I EE E 7 2 VPF be Ree ies erir iein Bee ra e Y vow Yee dx Ge a a GC E ECC 7 2 ihr PNE PK 7 3 jupe 7 4 Noc P 7 4 Quin A 7 5 0 METRE L x EMTrc En 7 5 Overview The Status branch of the Top Level menu allows you to view the current status of the dial or leased line connection the DTE interface and the identity for example serial number and model number of your equipment There are up to six selections under Status VF Identity DTE RS366A Options and Record 494 13086 03 Call_Setup Tik Data VF Identity DTE RS366A Options Record SigQual Ser LSD CRQ RcvLev Mod DTR DLO Sig Noise FRev DSR DPR NearEcho HP t Tst PND FarEcho FP t TXD DSC FarEchDel RXD ACR EchoF reqO ff RTS CTS 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996
122. as the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure YEditMisc 14 26 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Menu Tree dcs Ao ahd ee CETT Ate han Bee Tees ye SNR E hig Overview The following pages provide graphic representations of the general menu structure of the front panel or SDCP displays The model installed features and configuration options all may affect what is actually displayed at each level of the menus 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Call_Setup Dial Answer Disconnect A Dial Standby or Return to Dial A Directory Locations 1 10 A Does not appear in Remote Mode Rem Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop and Pattern appear if the secondary channel is used Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected TIk Data Change Directory VF Identity Ser Mod FRev HP t FPt SigQual RcvLev Sig Noise NearEcho FarEcho FarEchDel EchoF reqO ff LSD DTR DSR Tst TXD RXD RTS CTS Displays current status of modem along with data rate and error control mode RS366A Options CRQ DLO DPR PND DSC ACR to next page Test Record Abort amp Self amp Rem_Digital_Loop A Loc Analog Loop A Pattern A Loc_Digital_Loop A to next page fee ela ck i DTE
123. asynchronous DTE terminal Disable Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line This is known as blind dialing The period of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Pause configuration option The factory default is Enable AT commands to disable are X0 X1 and X3 AT commands to enable are X2 X4 X5 X6 and X7 9 20 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 3 2 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options Blind Dial Paus 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Blind Dial Pause Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when DialTone Detect is disabled NOTE The Blind Dial Pause configuration option only appears when the Dial Tone Detect configuration option is disabled The factory default is 2sec AT command is S register S6 n where nis a value from 2 to 255 in 1 second increments BusyTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Busy Tone Detect Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone Enable or ignore Busy Tone Disable This configuration option is normally enabled however if the modem receives false busy tones this configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones The factory default is Enable AT commands to disable are X0 X1 and X2 AT commands to enable are X3 X4 X5 X6 and X7 Pause Time 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Pause Time Determi
124. ations for specific applications Factory is a read only unchangeable configuration area containing six sets of predefined configuration options labeled Async Dial Sync Dial Sync Leased Answer Originate UNIX Dial Cellular Mobile and Cellular PSTN These sets contain the most commonly used configuration options for modems installed in these hardware environments and give you a head start in configuring your modem Factory default settings are listed in Appendix G NOTE If you are using AT commands a period of time can exist in which the contents of Active Operating and Active Saved differ Once you issue an AT amp WO write command however the two storage areas are identical 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Figures 9 1 and 9 2 graphically display the interaction between the edit area and configuration areas as viewed from the perspective of the DCP and the AT command set CONTENTS OF Active Saved ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED TO Active Operating WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE DCP ON A RESET OR ON POWER UP Active Operating Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Factory Async Dial Sync Dial UNIX Dial Load Edit Area From EDIT AREA ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND EDIT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ANY CHANGES MADE TO CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ARE SAVED TO Active Saved Customer 1 OR Customer 2 Figure 9 1 DCP Configuration Proces
125. ba eek gid aee ig tee i et OR el arte n UR A ROS E 1 BIA R5 300 A Pin ASSISHIHCHS i e eed rie Ro bc mea o qe e RR Rp OR eh kg Seb a e E 3 VE Connector Pr Assignments yerse rore drenere enr e REPERI RexDE IG eis bx e et reds E 4 Overview EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Table E 1 lists the EIA 232 D pin assignments for the This appendix lists the pin assignments for EIA 232 D modem EIA RS 366 A and VF TELCO interfaces 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 E 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table E 1 EIA 232 D Pin Assignments jag Name Mo it CCITT Eaa Circuit Function 1 AA 101 Shield 2 TXD BA 103 DTE Transmit Data 3 RXD BB 104 DCE Receive Data 4 RTS CA 105 DTE Request to Send 5 CTS CB 106 DCE Clear to Send 6 DSR CC 107 DCE Data Set Ready 7 SG AB 102 Signal Ground 8 LSD CF 109 DCE Line Signal Detect 9 10V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 10 10V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 11 Unassigned 12 CT112 CI 112 DCE Data Signal Rate Select 13 mm Reserved for future function 14 Reserved for future function 15 TXC DB 114 DCE Transmit Clock 16 E Reserved for future function 17 RXC DD 115 DCE Receive Clock 18 CT141 LL 141 DTE Local Loopback 20 DTR CD 108 DTE Data Terminal Ready
126. back Loc Digital Loop Local Digital Loopback and Pattern The only tests that can operate concurrently are Pattern with a Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote Digital Loopback If any test is operating besides the two combinations just mentioned it must be canceled before starting another test The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests If any parameters need to be set refer to the Tests section discussed in Chapter 9 Configure Branch 494 13087 02 Test T I Abort Self Loc Analog Loop Rem Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop Pattern 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 8 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Test Branch To access the Test branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Idle 19 2 VAN Status Test A L 8 DJ oe Press the key until Test appears Select Test Abort Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the modem back to the normal mode of operation Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete message Test A pa es 5j nj Select Abort Test Abort A onem x fa fe tel ie m The modem stops all tests currently in progress and displays the Command Complete status message on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key AT Command Equivalent T
127. be made available as soon as possible after receiving a disconnect command NOTE This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem which may interpret the disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S85 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Line Crnt Disc Enab gt 8msec Nxt Enab gt 8msec Enab gt 90msec Disable Line Current Disconnect Determines the modem s response to short interruptions of line current The loss of line current is one method of disconnecting a call Enable gt 8 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds Enable gt 90 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds Use this setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set for Enab gt 8msec Disable Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting The factory default is Enab 8msec AT command is S register S65 n where nis 0 for Enable gt 8 msec 1 for Enable gt 90 msec and 2 for Disable Long Space Disc Enable Nxt Enable Disable Long Space Disconnect Determines the modem s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote modem when it goes on hook Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call NOTE This configuration option is ignored when the modem operates in Synchronous
128. bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must be 10 bits or less The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less AT prefix determines parity of the character Stop Bits 1 Nxt 1 2 Number of Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of a character The factory default is 1 NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits see DTE Dialer configuration options group Total character size consists of a start bit number of data bits parity bits and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must be 10 bits or less The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 9 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 1 3 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options DTR Action Ignore Nxt Stndrd RS232 Ignore CnirlsOnHook Off ReloadSirp Off CmdMode CnirisTXMute Data Terminal Ready Action DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and ready for operation Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA 232 D and CCITT V 24 specifications If this signal is not present the modem will not answer
129. ble is X1 Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Disable Nxt Disable Enable Modem to Modem Flow Control If a modem s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem but is not passing on to the DTE it can issue XON XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem This only applies if Buffer nonerror control mode is selected If Error Control mode is enabled flow control between the modems will happen automatically regardless of the setting of this option Disable Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line Also the modem will not transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Enable Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receives an XOFF character over the VF line An XON character will enable data transmission Also the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop the flow of data to process it The factory default is Disable NOTE This configuration option is only available if Flow Control is configured for XON XOFF AT Command for Disable is GO AT Command for Enable is G1 This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 199
130. c Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 35 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 6 3 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options EC Negotiat Bfr Disable Nxt Disable Enable Disab amp Switch Error Control Negotiate Buffer Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs Disable Data is not buffered during the link negotiating handshaking sequence Enable Data is buffered while the link is being established Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the handshaking sequence Disable and Switch Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence However when the modem receives an error control fallback character it switches to Buffer mode See EC Fallback Char configuration option The factory default is Disable AT command for Disable is CO AT command for Enable is C1 AT command for Disab amp Switch is C2 EC Fallbck Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI Error Control Fallback Character This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control fallback character This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link negotiating handshaking sequence by sending th
131. ck remote mode indicator result code Return to Dial RJ11 SDU Select key serial transmission Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU S registers Sync Dial A part of the modem s memory that contains values that determine the modem s operating characteristics A branch of the Top Level menu that permits access to the DCP of another modem A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem the remote modem and the circuit between them An inverse video that indicates the modems are operating in Remote mode An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to dial line operation when currently on leased lines A type of 6 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone sets A type of 50 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines A type of 50 position jack normally used with programmable dial networks providing the appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines A type of 8 position jack normally used with programmable dial networks A TELCO service whereby multiple lines to a customer premise share a common telephone number Shared Diagnostic Control Panel An optional user interface similar to the front panel of a M
132. ckplane baud Bisync bit bps buffer byte Call Setup carrier carrier mounted CCITT When leased line operation fails this function forces the modem to dial the telephone number stored in directory location 1 communication over the dial network continues with the remote modem For a 3800 Series modem to perform this properly the telephone number in directory location 1 must be the telephone number at the remote site Also the Auto Dial Backup configuration option in one modem must be enabled while the other modem must have the Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled When operating in Dial Backup mode this function forces the modem to periodically check the quality of the leased line If the leased line is found to be at normal operating condition the modem disconnects from the dial network and continues normal operation over the leased line network The primary route from a control modem to its first tributary when the communications network contains extended controls A common bus at the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier connecting each circuit card slot to the SDCP and or SDU It also distributes low voltage ac power to each slot A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second This is not necessarily the same as bits per second although the terms are frequently interchanged Binary Synchronous Communications An IBM communications protocol that has become an
133. co Ir ERR Ek EE Rn D 1 b Pin AssipuinenisS 22lplrzcclemes Re Rr E he EAR AER E 1 F CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response F 1 G Default Configuration Options 005 G 1 H Equptment TAS sick bowie beh ERR x Obra are EE H 1 Glossary Index 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 iii COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems List of Figures Figure Page 2 1 Model 3810and 3820 ie tolsee ak RP px rexb RR tare EP ERE 2 2 2 2 Model 3810 Rear Panel 2 ce scr ERREUR Re Rr ew RR eR 2 4 2 3 Model 3820 BearPangl cic etc LREEUEEE Rr beh nee Me dete eee es 2 5 Ir DIES NEP eee iad eals Cae Gaels teehee oe eee ee AG 3 2 3 2 Installing a Model 3811 Modem 2s ceed ree needa eke EE 3 3 3 9 CunutPack BOOK 42 5 4 door n see ds ane Dae ee ke Mae 3 4 4 14 Model S800 DGDB sue zuo eene se den iore SUR eer or ele He p Mes 4 2 4 2 Model S320 DEP i dioses ene sot tone esae dea ter See S Ape E qos 4 2 4 3 Optional SDCP Model 3811 Faceplate and Optional SDU 4 3 4 4 3800 Series LCD and Keypad osse eter tom em recte xd 4 6 o l Dial Backup 4 ienai E i e eR Oe a e ea e Ap be 5 4 8 1 Local Analog Loopback ec tee eec eg 8 3 8 2 Remote Dipital Loopback s cer eee ete a a eas 8 4 8 3 Local Digital Loopback sose cederet trece a e see ua 8 5 8 4 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test seleeeeeees 8 6 8 5 Pattern Test and Remote Digital Loopback Test 0 005 8 6
134. configuring commands for example ATD ATA and ATI are executed the ERROR result code is never returned The factory default is Normal AT command is S register S84 n where n is 0 or 231 for Normal 1 or 232 for No ERROR or 2 or 233 for No Strap or ERROR V25bis Coding ASCII Nxt ASCII EBCDIC V 25bis Coding Identifies to the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V 25bis commands The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding NOTE This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis HDLC or V25bis Bsync The factory default is ASCII AT command is S register S62 n where nis 0 for ASCII or 1 for EBCDIC V25bis IdleFill Mark Nxt Mark Flag V 25bis Idle Fill Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE The modem responds to the DTE using the same idle fill NOTE This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis HDLC The factory default is Mark AT command is S register S63 n where n is 0 for Mark or 1 for Flag This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT 9 18 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 2 5 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options V 25b NewLineChr CR LF Nxt CR LF CRLF V 25bis New Line Character Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V 25bis Async mode The modem respon
135. control negotiation V 42bis V 42 MNP 5 and below Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs V 42 MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation This is also known as V42 MNP Autoreliable Mode V 42 MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode This is also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode Buffer Mode Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate This mode should only be used if the DTE provides its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated This setting is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set for Direct mode This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 9 34 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 6 2
136. ct is N2 AT command for MNP or Buffer is N3 AT command for V42 MNP or Disconnect is N4 AT command for V42 MNP or Buffer is N5 AT Command for LAPM or Disconnect is N6 AT Command for LAPM or Buffer is N7 V42bis Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable V 42bis Compression Enables or disables V 42bis data compression Enable Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions This is the recommended setting for all applications Disable V 42bis data compression is disabled This is rarely needed because V 42bis data compression does not cause data expansion for compressed data The factory default is Enable NOTE This configuration option is only available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for V42 MNPorBfr or V42 MNPorDsc AT command for Disable is HO AT commands for Enable are H1 H2 or H3 MNP5 Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable MNP5 Compression Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 data compression It can be set independently of V 42bis data compression Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs The factory default is Enable NOTE This configuration option is only available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr or MNP or Disc AT command for Disable is 96CO AT command for Enable is C1 This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Asyn
137. ctory comes into view then press the F1 key to display the factory preset configurations Factory preset configurations are Async Dial Sync Dial Sync Leased UNIX Dial Cellular Mobile and Cellular PSTN If Sync Leased is selected you must choose either Answer or Originate mode 4 Press the key until the appropriate factory preset appears on the LCD and press the corresponding function key to select your choice 5 Choose Function appears and displays the Edit and Save functions 6 Press the F3 key Save to save the new factory preset configuration to one of three configuration areas Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas The LCD now displays Sav EditArea to 7 Press the gt key until the appropriate configuration area appears on the LCD then press the corresponding function key to select your choice Saving configuration options to the Active Saved configuration area automatically saves them to the Active Operating configuration area The LCD displays Command Complete 8 The modem is now configured with the selected factory template Press the Z key to return to the Top Level menu Refer to Chapter 9
138. d Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations 5 5 Overview The Call Setup branch of the Top Level menu allows you to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls It also allows you to create and store up to 10 telephone numbers to directory locations Six different functions can appear under Call Setup Dial Disconnect Answer Dial Standby or Return to Dial when applicable and Change Directory NOTE The Dial Standby and Return to Dial functions only appear when the modem is in Dial Backup mode If the Model 3820 is operating on leased lines Change Directory is the only function available Call Setup Dial Answer Change Directory Disconnect Dial Standby or Return to Dial Directory Locations 1 10 494 13084 02 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 5 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Call Setup Branch In the following descriptions the shaded key indicates what key to press to perform the described operation To access the Call Setup branch from the Top Level menu select Call_Setup Idle 19 2 gt ZN Call Setup CA Dial Dial allows you to dial any telephone number stored in directory locations 1 10 Any telephone number dialed using the DCP must already exist in a directory location Refer to Change Directory for information on storing telephone numbers in directory locations To access Dial from the Call Setup branch
139. d well ventilated Allow space around the modem for installing cables and telephone cords and make sure the modem is located within reach of the ac power outlet The distance between your modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data rates exceed 19 200 bps Also low capacitance cables may be necessary for speeds greater than 19 200 bps or distances greater than 50 feet The rear panel of both the Model 3810 and Model 3820 modems have the following switches and connectors see Figures 2 2 and 2 3 which appear later in this chapter e An ON Off power switch e A 5 pin DIN type power receptacle for ac power transformer e An 8 pin modular keyed jack for 4 wire 2 wire leased lines or external telephone set on the Model 3810 On the Model 3820 this jack is for external telephone set use only e An 8 pin modular keyed jack for dial Public Switched Telephone Network or PSTN lines on the Model 3810 On the Model 3820 this jack is for dial or 2 wire leased lines e A 4 pin modular jack for Network Management System NMS connection for future release e A 25 pin DB 25 S receptacle for DTE interface 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 2 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Connecting Model 3810 and Model 3820 Modems with Supplied Cables Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 3 show how Model 3810 and Model 3820 modems are connected to certain TELCO jack types using the supplied cables For other TELCO connections refer to Appendix E DT
140. des Once the modems are online either by answering or originating a call they automatically switch to Data mode Data mode is a state where any entries made from the DTE are considered data and are transmitted and received between modems The modems remain in Data mode until the connection is broken or until they are forced into online Command mode using the escape sequence Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode Sometimes it is necessary to change operating parameters while the modems are online The escape sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data mode and online Command mode while maintaining a connection with the remote modem This is accomplished using the escape sequence to exit Data mode and the O command to return to Data mode Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is online and in Data mode The 3800 Series modem uses three consecutive plus characters as the escape sequence To change this value refer to S register S2 discussed later in Table 14 2 in the S Register Format section To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded in data as an escape sequence the Escape Guard Time value determines the length of the pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The 3800 Series modem uses a one second pause as the Escape Guard Time To change this value refer to S register S12 discussed later in Table 14 2 in the S Register
141. dialed using the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory location NOTE If the modem is operating on leased lines and has a dial line attached for dial backup purposes it is required that directory location 1 contain the telephone number used for dial backup To access Change Directory from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Change_Directory anes Mt Jy C Press the key until Change Directory is displayed Press any function key to select Change_Directory 01 5551234 aX Nxt t Gg c 9 2 5 The phone number listed in directory location 1 is displayed Select Nxt to display other directory locations Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations The following example uses an empty directory location for describing how to enter a telephone number If you want to change an existing telephone number in any of the ten directory locations follow the same procedures To add a telephone number to a directory location make the following selections Select Nxt until a blank directory appears on the LCD The cursor always appears in the first character position Select F2 1 or F3 until the desired character is selected This can be an alpha or numeric character Press the key to move the cursor to the next character position Continue thi
142. dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The factory setting is tone dial Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option see Line Dialer configuration option group or by value held in S register S8 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 1 2 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT Command Description Front Panel Branch Dn cont d W or Wait for dial tone Modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or a second tone received when dialing through a tandem PBX for example 94555 6789 or when invoking special features for example 70 W555 6789 where 70 disables Call Waiting R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R parameter must be the last character in the dial string For correct operation at least one ringback must be detected therefore the remote modem should be configured to answer on the second ring or subsequent rings 9 Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialin
143. dicates that the modem has received an incorrect V 25bis command from the DTE INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR The INV response format is INVxx Where xx is CU command unknown MS message syntax error PS parameter syntax error PV parameter value error Table F 1 lists V 25bis commands supported by the 3800 Series modems Table F 1 V 25bis Commands AT Command V 25bis Command Description S Register Equivalent CALL REQUEST COMMANDS CRN Call Request with Number Provided ATD CRS Call Request with Memory Address ATDS CALL ANSWER COMMANDS INC Incoming Call Indication RING DIC Disregard Incoming Call NONE CIC Connect Incoming Call ATA PROGRAM COMMAND PRN Program Normal AT amp Z LIST REQUEST RLN Request to List Stored Number NONE F 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response Table F 2 lists V 25bis response messages supported by the 3800 Series modems Table F 2 V 25bis Response Messages AT Command V 25bis Command Description Result Code Equivalent CALL RESPONSE CFI Call Failure Indication BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE ERROR CNX Call Connecting Indication CONNECT LIST RESPONSE LSN List Stored Number NONE COMMAND RESPONSE VAL Valid Command OK INV Invalid Command ERROR 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 F 5 Default Configuration Options cavo RCRUM PUE e
144. disable or enable the modem s AutoAnswer function These commands are issued from the DTE Call Answer commands include Incoming Call INC Disregard Incoming Call DIC and Connect Incoming Call CIC Incoming Call INC The INC response informs the DTE that the modem has detected a ring tone At this point the DTE can issue the DIC command to disable the modem from answering the call INC is similar to the AT result code RING Disregard Incoming Call DIC The DIC command prevents the modem from answering an incoming call This command is only valid once the DTE receives an incoming call INC response from the modem A DIC must be issued within 5 seconds after receiving an INC The DIC command format is DIC If DIC is issued within 5 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If DIC is issued after 5 seconds INV is returned Connect Incoming Call CIC The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any DIC commands and answer an incoming call This command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC command CIC must be issued within 10 seconds after sending a DIC CIC is similar to the ATA command The CIC command format is CIC If CIC is issued within 10 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If CIC is issued after 10 seconds INV is returned Program Normal PRN The Program Normal PRN command allows the DTE to enter and store a telephone number to a specific directory location PRN is si
145. displays Nxt and all selections available for the displayed security option e Nxt indicates that more options are available by scrolling down It also indicates that the value displayed on the LCD is the current setting e Use the lt and keys to move selections into view e Use the F2 and F3 keys to choose selections e Ifno changes have been made and the X key is pressed the LCD returns to the Top Level menu e If changes have been made and the 4 or x key is pressed then Save Edit appears on the LCD Table 12 1 describes the settings of the Edit Table Password group options 12 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security Table 12 1 Edit Password Table Group Options PsWdType xxxx Nxt Cleared DTE Entry VF Entry VF plus DTE Password Type Indicates whether this index location is configured for VF side password DTE side password or both Cleared displays for an index location that contains no valid entry Note that this option only identifies the type of password used For proper operation the type of password selected must be consistent with the type of security used Refer to the Set Answer Security group option found later in this chapter XXXX Indicates the selected index location Cleared Indicates that the index location does not contain any valid selections and is currently unused DTE Entry Indicates that this index s password is configured for DTE side password entry Special requ
146. do not recognize Result Codes as words therefore numbers are required The Numbers 2 format is required for some modem pooling applications For a list of result codes refer to Table B 1 in Appendix B The factory default is Words AT command for Numbers 1 is VO AT command for Words format is V1 AT command for Numbers 2 is V2 AT Cmnd Mode Normal Nxt Normal No ERROR NoSirapOrERR AT Command Mode Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands NOTE Since this configuration option affects AT commands it cannot be changed by the AT amp F command However it can be changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP Normal Allows normal operation of the AT command set The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues the ERROR result code for invalid commands If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands No ERROR Operates similar to Normal mode however the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid commands When an invalid command is encountered the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands No Strap or ERROR Ignores all AT commands including valid commands that cause a configuration option to change Only non
147. do not have cellular enhancements installed or enabled AT commands are S91 0 for Disable and S91 1 for Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 39 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Tests Table 9 7 shows each Tests configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default The Tests configuration options determine specifics setting the default value if the modem is just being such as the duration of a test for the various diagnostic installed shown following the colon on the first line tests available to the modem and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 7 1 of 2 Test Configuration Options DTE RL CT140 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Remote Loopback Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 CCITT 140 is turned ON Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21 Th
148. download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative To Local via DTE This function is for use by Customer Service personnel only to transfer new firmware to 3800 Series modems Automatic Firmware Download The latest 3800 Series firmware is available at no charge from the Automatic Firmware Download Center To download the firmware your modem must be configured for dialing Save your modem s current configuration to the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area and load the Async Dial factory template See Chapter 9 Configure Branch for information about saving and changing configuration options Using your 3800 Series modem dial the Automatic Firmware Download Center at 1 813 530 7026 You may use any dialing technique DCP Dial AT command or V 25bis Call Request If you have a DTE a terminal or PC attached to your modem informational messages are displayed on it when the modem is connected These show the amount of time the download will take However a DTE is not required The download begins without any operator action When the download begins the DCP displays download status messages with the data bank number current block being loaded and the total number of blocks There are two data banks Download Status Bank 1 0088 0092 es Cm Gc Le 08 L5 0m If the modem connected at 14 400 bps the download takes about 10 minutes When the download is complete the
149. ds to the DTE using the same line terminator NOTE This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V25bis Async The factory default is CR LF AT command is S register S64 n where nis 0 for carriage return and line feed 1 for carriage return or 2 for line feed DTR Cont Repeat Disable End Disable Enable DTR Cont Repeat Determines whether automatic redialing stops after the directory locations defined by DTR Auto Redial S37 have all been tried unsuccessfully once If DTR Cont Repeat is enabled automatic redialing starts again with directory location 1 The default is Disable A redial attempt is made in response to a bad phone number a busy signal no answer or no quiet answer However a lockout from redialing occurs if ten successive failing call attempts are made to the same number DTR Cont Repeat is accessible only if the DTE Dialer Type is DTR Dirs Disable Automatic redialing will not be repeated Enable Automatic will be repeated if necessary AT command is S register S38 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 19 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Line Dialer Table 9 3 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory The Line Dialer configuration options establish default setting the default value if the modem is just parameters used by the modem to answer or originate being installed
150. e Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow 10 30 60 min Modem disconnects if data is not received or transmitted within 10 minute 30 minute or 60 minute intervals The factory default is Disable The reloading of factory defaults does not affect No Data Disconnect AT command to enable is Tn where nis a value from 1 minute to 255 minutes AT command to disable is TO NoDataDiscTrig Nxt TXDorRXD TXD and RXD TXD Only RXD Only No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal Works in conjunction with No Data Disconnect YT and determines whether Pin 2 transmit data or Pin 3 receive data of the modem s RS 232 serial interface is monitored so that the modem can disconnect the call if there is no activity for a certain period of time The No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal configuration option is unavailable and is not displayed on the DCP when No Data Disconnect is disabled The factory default is TXD or RXD The reloading of factory defaults does not affect No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal TXD or RXD Disconnect if no data transmitted or received for specified period TXD and RXD Disconnect if no data transmitted and received for specified period TXD Only Disconnect if no data transmitted for specified period RXD Only Disconnect if no data received for specified period AT command is S80 n S80 0 Transmit or Receive S80 1 Transmit Only S80 2 Receive Only S80 3 Transmit and Receive 38
151. e but erases the contents of the modem s security database To change the Administrative Password make the following selections Set Access Ctrl A Eve i A lt ES rs Cc Press until Set Admin PsWd appears Select Set Admin PsWd Set Admin PsWd Z Ent 100000000 A a te re e The Administrative Password appears Press the F2 1 key to increment password values Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the new password value is entered Press the F1 key to save the new password value Reset Security Reset Security is the second major function within the Security branch of the Top Level menu It erases all contents of the security database table and resets all index locations to Cleared Two selections appear under Reset Security Abort Security Reset and Erase All PassWords Use Reset Security if you want to redo the entire security database table CAUTION This function can be used as a last resort if the Administrative Password is no longer known This function causes the Administrative Password to default to the Reset Default password and erases the contents of the database table To reset security make the following selections Security lt A Reset_Security A lt a be 8 gt From the Security branch press until Reset Securit
152. e factory default is Disable AT command is S register S51 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DTE LL CT141 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Local Loopback Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test Enable The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 CCITT 141 is turned ON Local loopback ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18 The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S52 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Test Timeout Disable Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec Test Time out Determines how long a test runs before aborting Disable Allows a test to run indefinitely 30 60 or 240 seconds Allows the test to run for 30 seconds 60 seconds or 240 seconds The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S18 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 to 255 seconds Rcv Remote Loop Enable Nxt Enable Disable Receive Remote Loopback Response Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued from a remote modem The factory default is Enable AT command for Enable is amp T4 AT command for Disable is amp T5 9 40 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 7 2 of 2 Test Configuration Opti
153. e labeled F1 F2 and F3 If a selection spans more than one function key then any of those keys choose that selection Select Key Model 3811 only Status Test Configure Control The Select key appears on the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier It is used to connect the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier Menu Structure The menu tree is a hierarchical structure used to display functions that configure and control local and Remote Security remote 3800 Series modems It is accessed via the DCP and is shown in Appendix A The menu tree contains the following branches Used to switch the modem between Talk mode the modem is disconnected from the VF line and Data mode the modem is connected to the VF line when dialing via either the DCP or the attached telephone See Chapter 6 Used to monitor the current status of the VF line and DTE interface as well as view the identity of the modem See Chapter 7 Used to begin and end various modem tests See Chapter 8 Used to change and save the modem s configuration options See Chapter 9 Used to control the modem s hardware and software functions See Chapter 10 Used to access and control a remote 3800 Series modem See Chapter 11 Used to control the modem s dial access security Appears only if the optional security feature is installed See Chapter 12 Menu
154. e remote modem after it is commanded by the DTE to disconnect Register has the following values S49 0 Disable Immediate disconnect S49 1 1 second S49 2 2 seconds S49 255 255 seconds Factory setting is 10 seconds Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer 51 DTE RL CT140 Register determines if the modem performs a remote digital loopback if it receives a CT140 signal from the DTE Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Tests 52 DTE LL CT141 Register determines if the modem performs a local analog loopback if it receives a CT141 signal from the DTE Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure WEditl Tests 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 21 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 7 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch 53 V 54 Address Configure Edit Tests Identifies the address of the modem to be placed in a loopback test Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 34 Modem address Factory setting is Disable S54 V 54 Device Type Configure WEdit Tests Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network Register has the following values 0 Peripheral 1 Intermediate Factory setting is Peripheral S55 Access From Remote Configure Edit Misc Register
155. eaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to the modem s speaker volume Upon a reset speaker volume returns to its configured setting For more information on speaker settings refer to the Misc section in Chapter 9 To access Speaker from the Control branch make the following selections Control ZN Speaker NECS Select Speaker Speaker Control gt A Off Low Med amp a fe elie Press the key and appropriate function keys to choose the desired selection DCP selections are Off Turns the speaker off Low Adjusts speaker to low volume Med Adjusts speaker to medium volume High Adjusts speaker to high volume Command Complete appears on the LCD To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch press the lt key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the s key AT Command Equivalent The AT commands for ON Off are MO M1 and M2 The AT commands for volume control are LO L1 L2 and L3 Reset Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform a complete program restart The modem begins the power up test sequence that ends with the Top Level menu displayed on the LCD Configuration options stored in an Active Saved configuration area are copied to the Active Operating configuration area To access Reset from the Control branch make the following selection Control ZN Speaker i A rr re es
156. econd line of the LCD Table 4 5 Common Operational Messages Common Operational Indicates Messages Please Wait Appears when a command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete Command Sent Appears when a command is sent to a remote modem No Rem Response or Remote Modem Fail Appears when a remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds Command Complete Appears when a command issued to a local or remote modem is completed Invalid Command Appears when the modem cannot complete a command 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 11 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Messages listed in Table 4 6 are dial access security messages that can occur when the optional security feature is installed The Top Level menu s main branches appear on the LCD in the order of Call Setup Talk Data Status Test Configure Control Security and Remote These branches are described in the following chapters Table 4 6 Dial Access Security Messages Dial Access Security Indicates Messages Get VF PsWd The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password Get DTE PsWd The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE VF PsWd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the origi
157. ected Register determines whether the Active Operating area is reloaded upon a disconnect Register has the following values 0 or 231 No Change 1 or 232 Reload 2 or 233 Reload with no AT Change Factory setting is No Change Configure Edit V 42 MNP Buffer S89 V 42 ARQ Window Size Increase Register allows the V 42 Automatic Request for Transmission ARQ window size to be set to a value from 6 to 15 frames to accommodate satellite delays Register has the following values 0 for 6 frames default 1 for 7 frames 2 for 8 frames 3 for 9 frames 9 for 15 frames This command applies only to connections made using V 42bis data compression or V 42 error control Factory setting is 6 frames None S90 DTE Rate VF Rate Register forces the DTE computer data rate to be equal to the VF telephone line data rate Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure YEditMisc S91 Cellular Enhancements Register determines whether parameters are set to improve performance over a cellular link Should be enabled when the remote modem is using a cellular connection Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure YEditMisc S93 RJ11 Cellular Adapt Register controls support for an RJ11 connection including generation of the ETC 1 1 Calling Tone during call origination Register h
158. ed Mode Sets the modem for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Answer mode receiving a call or 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Originate initiating a call mode The only options available for Model 3820 modems are 2WLLOrig and 2WLL Ans NOTE For proper operation over leased lines one modem must be set for Originate mode and the other set for Answer mode For Sync Leased Answer Mode 4 wire Answer is the factory default Two wire Answer for the Model 3820 For Sync Leased Originate Mode 4 wire Originate is the factory default Two wire Originate for the Model 3820 AT command for Disable is amp LO AT command for 2 wire Originate is amp L1 AT command for 4 wire Originate is amp L2 AT command for 2 wire Answer is amp L3 AT command for 4 wire Answer is amp L4 LeasedLine Rate 14400 V32b Nxt 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis Leased Line Rate Determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines 19200 V 32t 16800 V32t 14400 V 32bis 12000 V 32bis 9600 V 32bis 7200 V 32bis 4800 V 32bis These modulation schemes are available on 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines If a fixed V 32bis rate is selected the modem can still be commanded to fall back by a remote modem NOTE The modem must be in Direct mode before the modulation scheme can be changed from V 32bis to another leased line modulation V 33 or V 22bis See Err
159. ed herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners do Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1996 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual 2 This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment groundi
160. emove and replace a Model 3810 or Model 3820 modem perform the following steps 1 Make sure the modem is offline and press the modem s rear panel power switch to the Off position 2 Disconnect the power cord from the ac power outlet and then from the connector on the rear of the modem 3 Disconnect the dial and leased line modular cords from the modem s rear panel 4 Disconnect the DTE interface cable from the modem s rear panel If the modem is to be removed for service return it using the procedures on page A in the front of this document for contact information 5 Install the replacement modem as described in the Model 3810 or Model 3820 Modem Installation section of this chapter and configure it the same way as the modem being replaced 2 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3811 Installation OVEIVIEW onse scopre Da e teres i ea e Model 3811 Installation Removing and Replacing Model 3811 Modems Overview The carrier mounted Model 3811 modem Figure 3 1 is capable of dial or 4 wire 2 wire leased line operation and installs into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier The Model 3811 s faceplate has 16 LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier s optional speaker The Model 3811 modem s rear has two DTE edge card connectors that mount into a connector plate located on the rear of the carrier This connector plate has two DB 25 S connect
161. ems is the same as for the 3610 DSU AC Power Transformer Connection Use the following procedures to connect the modem to an ac power outlet 1 Make sure the modem s power switch is in the Off position 2 Insert the power transformer s 5 pin DIN male connector into the modem s rear panel ac power receptacle Figures 2 2 and 2 3 3 Insert the power transformer into a grounded ac power outlet 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 2 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Modem Power Up Once your modem is properly connected to the DTE dial and or leased lines and ac outlet press the modem s rear panel power switch to the ON position The modem begins a power up self test This test takes several seconds to perform and verifies the operation of most hardware components within the modem If successful the LCD displays Power On Selftst Passed and continues to the Top Level menu screen Power On Selftst Passed ES rs rt re rs ce If a failure occurs during the self test the LCD displays Power On Selftst Failed for several seconds The LCD then displays the Top Level menu screen with the message Power on Fail appearing on the top line of the LCD Although a failure has occurred the modem will attempt to operate This allows you to activate a more thorough self test using the Test branch Refer to Chapter 8 Test Branch Removing and Replacing Model 3810 and Model 3820 Modems To r
162. es G 1 Overview Table G 1 in this appendix lists all default configuration options for the four factory preset configurations An N A indicates that the value for this configuration option does not appear on the LCD if that factory default configuration is selected Table G 1 1 of 4 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Option Async Dial and UNIX Dial Default Settings Sync Dial Default Settings Sync Leased Answer Originate Mode Default Settings DTE Interface Async Sync Mode Async DTE Rate Data Bits Parity Bit Stop Bits DTR Action DSR Control RTS Action CTS Control Wink When Disc LSD Control TX Clock Source CT111 Rate Control Async 19 200 bps 8 None 1 Ignore Forced ON Ignore Forced On RTS CTS Delay Standard RS232 Wink When Disc N A Disable Sync N A N A N A N A Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 0 msec Standard RS232 Internal Disable Sync N A 7 Odd N A Ignore Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 0 msec Standard RS232 Internal Disable UNIX Dial default setting only 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table G 1 2 of 4 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Option Async Dial and UNIX Dial Default Settings Sync Dial Default Settings Sync Leased Answer Originate Mode Default Settings
163. et Orig Sec group found in the Security branch This configuration option enables or disables security protection used for outbound calls when using the AT command autodialer function This configuration option does not appear if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for No Answer Security 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 47 Control Branch 1 0 cil T CRDI Control Braneli oeiras ket one e et es cce Lj E IRGSeR cones e ev I PReuwec sii tevaau gs Make Busy Remove Make Busy Service Line Disconnect Service Line Download Code s eee eee ewe Clone to Reniofe 2o deett Wo Local vag DTE ante doc tte Automatic Firmware Download Download Pail re Lem bed aes aed Overview The Control branch of the Top Level menu allows you to manage hardware and software functions such as speaker volume reset busy out and firmware download The Model 3811 has the additional hardware function Service Line Call Setup Tik Data Speaker Reset Make_Busy Control Branch To access Control from the Top Level menu make the following selections Idle 19 2 lt A Control Remote A Gc BJ 2 5 Press the gt key until Control appears Select Control 494 13089 02 Service Line Download Code or RemoveMakeBusy DiscServLine 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 10 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Speaker Sp
164. ettings in the 3800 Series modem thereby permitting communication with the calling modem Upon disconnection the 3800 Series modem falls back to its original configuration settings and resumes normal operation The modem s compatibility with a number of dialing methods and protocols such as asynchronous AT commands CCITT V 25bis dialing EIA RS 366 A dialing for carrier mounted modems and the user friendly diagnostic control panel DCP permits the 3800 Series modem to be used in a variety of applications and environments while also allowing control over modem configuration dialing and diagnostics The 3800 Series modems offer four preset factory configurations containing the most often used modem settings These factory presets provide quick configuration for any asynchronous synchronous dial synchronous leased or UNIX hardware based dial environments The 3800 Series family is available in three models the Model 3810 a 4 wire 2 wire standalone modem the Model 3811 a carrier mounted version of the standalone unit and the Model 3820 a 2 wire standalone unit All three models offer a variety of modulation schemes and network enhancements while still providing reliable high speed data transmission using the latest in modem technology 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 1 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Features The 3800 Series modems have a wide variety of features Dial Line Modulations V 32terbo 19 200 and
165. eturn to Dial The Dial Standby and Return to Dial functions appear on the LCD only after the Model 3810 or Model 3811 operating on leased lines is placed into dial backup Once the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode these functions allow the modem to be switched back and forth between dial and leased line operation while still maintaining the dial connection See Figure 5 1 Switching between dial and leased line operation can be performed manually or automatically by enabling the Auto Dial Standby configuration option For example under normal dial backup conditions when a problem occurs on the leased line the modems establish a connection over the dial network using a telephone number stored in directory location 1 Call Setup ZN Dial Standby lam ea ere to ees When this occurs the Dial Standby function now appears on the LCD By selecting this function the modem switches back to the leased line while still maintaining the dial connection As a result the Return to Dial function now appears on the LCD instead of Dial Standby Call Setup A Return_to_Dial d je 5 l2 le Cm If the leased line is found to be unacceptable select Return to Dial which switches the modem back to dial network operation LCD displays Dial Standby If however the leased line is operating properly you can select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch and drop the dial line call NOTE W
166. etworking Protocol detects and corrects data errors caused by telephone line noise and signal distortion MNP5 includes data compression Glossary 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Glossary modem modulation network network address NIM NMS off hook on hook Originate mode parity PBX permissive interface physical address power up self test product code programmable interface protocol PSTN pulse dialing Modulator DEModulator A device that transforms signals from digital to analog form and vice versa The process of varying some characteristics usually amplitude frequency and or phase of a carrier wave to form data transmissions A communications circuit The customer assigned diagnostic address of a tributary modem Network Interface Module The interface provided up to two per carrier for the public switched telephone network PSTN used by Model 3811 dial modems Network Management System A set of diagnostic and configuration management tools for a data communication network consisting of software programs and dedicated computer hardware A telephone or modem is being used A telephone or modem is not being used The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a call In a dial network it is the modem that makes the call In a leased line network it is one of two sides of the network that is selected to be the originating modem A way of checking data accurac
167. f fax modem operation Chapter 14 provides instructions for displaying and changing AT commands and S registers Appendix A provides a menu tree for 3800 Series modems Appendix B provides a list of the result codes produced by 3800 Series modems Appendix C provides instructions for performing diagnostic tests when data communications problems occur Appendix D provides technical specifications Appendix E provides EIA RS 232 EIA RS 366A and VF TELCO pin assignments Appendix F provides V 25bis dialing information Appendix G provides a list of all default configuration options available for the four factory preset configurations Async Dial Sync Dial Sync Leased and UNIX Dial Appendix H provides an equipment list for 3800 Series modems The Glossary provides a description of terms used throughout this manual A reference card is inserted inside the back cover Related Documents 3000 A2 GA31 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System User s Guide 6700 A2 GY31 3610 A2 GZ45 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F 3 300 Installation Instructions Call your sales representative to order additional product documentation 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 vii OVER VICI de LI eet e et teas tetro aoo x Beanie Su ko aea aaa a a Mete dd sse OUO o s ess eed pecado Reactor acp esce Qc te bn COMSPHERE 3800 Series Models O
168. fer Buffer Break Forces Send Break Control Control Control Escape Configure Edit KO Discard Data Break First Enable V42 MNP Buffer W Discard Data Break First Disable Break F E K2 Keep Data Break First Enable Coi eed DIE K3 Keep Data Break First Disable Sah igure Edit K4 Keep Data Data First Enable later K5 Keep Data Data First Disable K6 Discard Break Not Applic Disable n Error Control Mode Configure Edit WO Buffer Mode V42 MNP Buffer 14 12 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 1 11 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT Front Panel Command Description Branch Qn Flow Control of DTE Flow Control of Modem Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer Flow Flow Control Control of of DTE Modem Q0 Disable Disable Q1 XON XOFF XON XOFF Q2 CTS to DTE Disable Q3 CTS to DTE RTS to Mdm Q4 XON XOFF Disable Q5 Disable XON XOFF Q6 Disable RTS to Mdm Tn No Data Disconnect Timer Configure Edit Line TO Disable Dialer Tn Where nis a value from 1 to 255 in 1 minute increments Xn XON XOFF Passthrough Flow Control Configure Edit X0 Disable V42 MNP Buffer X1 Enable AnN Error Control Fallback Character Configure Edit An Where nis an ASCII value from 0 to 127 Factory default is 013 ASCII V42 MNP Buffer Bn Modulation and Data Rate Sets the modulation and maximum VF rate The B300 and B1200 commands work in conj
169. figuration area Active Saved The shaded key indicates what key to press Idle 19 2 c A Test med x F1 F2 F3 gt Select Configure from the Top Level menu LdEdit Areafrm 26 a d A a fe re r E LdEdit Areafrm ZN Activ Operating CA Gc E iJ l9 0 Select the Factory configuration area Ld Fact Preset A Async_Dial Em e F Select Async Dial Choose Function Edit Select Edit Edit StrapGroup A DTE Interface n re r Edit StrapGroup lt ZN Tests Misc lt r re fr Scroll across the LCD and select the Misc configuration options group StrapsWhenDisc gt A Nxt No Change A lt Ei F2 E ce RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt 100000000 5 L2 L5 Gm 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears RemAccssPasswrd A ie ness c C 883 C cm 100000000 Select the F2 1 key to increment password values RemAccssPasswrd a Ni 100000000 X w eJ eie sa Press the key to move the cursor to the next position RemAccssPasswrd A Ke 112345678 A ja fa fe re Continue this sequence until you have entered the new password value To save the new pa
170. firmware revision level 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 7 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems DTE DTE displays the state and or activity of the EIA 232 D interface leads LSD DTR DSR Tst TXD RXD RTS and CTS signals are monitored The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds To access DTE from the Status branch make the following selections Status A Identity Press the key until DTE appears Select DTE LSD DTR DSR Tst gt B l fa fe re ie em The activity and state of the modem s DTE signal appear on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll other signals into view The LCD s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead The first symbol indicates the signal s activity during the sampling interval An asterisk indicates at least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions since the last update The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time A Ml block indicates a Space or ON condition while an underscore _ indicates a Mark or Off condition To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent There is no AT command for DTE status RS366A RS366A displays the state and or activity of the RS366A interface leads CRQ DLO DPR PND DSC and ACR Typically R
171. g the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends either a NO ANSWER result to the DTE Hook flash This causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call This is useful when the number exceeds 40 characters or when the wait time between parts of a dial string is unknown Space and These characters are ignored by the dial string and can be included in the dial string to enhance readability DS n Dial Stored Number Dials the number stored in Location n 1 10 To store a telephone number refer to the amp Zn x command Call Setup DialDial Directory En Command Character Echo EO Disables echo to the DTE E1 Enables echo to the DTE Configure Edit DTE Dialer Hn Hook Switch Control HO Modem goes on hook H1 Modem goes off hook HO Call Setup Disconnect or Control Remove Make Busy H1 Control Make Busy 14 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 1 3 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT see Front Panel Command Description Branch In Identification Status ldentity 10 Displays product code default is 144 I Displays 3 digit firmware revision number I2 Performs an EPROM check 13 Displays the modem s serial number 14 Displays the modem s m
172. gister None Displays value of S register where ris the S register number T Tone Dial Configure WEditLine Sets the modem for tone dial mode Dialer 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 1 4 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT se Front Panel Command Description Branch Vn Result Code Format Configure Edit DTE VO Displays result codes in Number 1 format digits Dialer V1 Displays result codes as text V2 Displays result codes in Number 2 format digits Xn Extended Result Code Dial Tone Detect and Busy Tone Detect Extended Result Code Configuration Options Configure Edit DTE Dialer Ext Dial Tone Busy Tone Dial Tone Detect Result Code Detect Detect Configure Edit Line Dialer X0 Disable Disable Disable Busy Tone Detect X1 Enable Disable Disable Configure Edit Line X2 Enable Enable Disable Dialer X3 Enable Disable Enable X4 Enable Enable Enable X5 Add EC Enable Enable X6 Add V42 MNP Enable Enable X7 Use DTE Rate Enable Enable EXTENDED RESULT CODE Enable Displays all result codes listed in Table B 1 except for error control suffix Disable Only displays OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Add EC Displays result codes with EC suffix Add V42 MNP Displays result codes with either V 42 or MNP suffix Use DTE Rate Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate Add V42 MNP Displays result codes with either V 42 or MNP suffix
173. gnostic Control Panel 2 1 description 4 1 Hidden Choice Indicators 4 6 keypad 4 6 operation 4 6 security access 4 15 shared 4 3 types 4 1 using to change factory presets 4 13 default configuration options 4 13 14 7 G 1 setting with AT commands 4 13 setting with DCP 4 13 Dial 5 2 dial backup C 4 Dial command 14 3 Dial Command modifiers 14 3 1 hook flash 5 6 CED pause 5 6 return to Command mode 5 6 P Pulse dial 5 6 9 20 14 3 R Reverse 5 6 T Tone dial 5 6 9 20 14 3 W Wait 5 6 Dial Line Rate 9 26 14 19 dial network connection 2 6 Dial Standby Return to Dial 5 4 Dial Stored Number DS 14 4 Dial Tone Detect 9 20 Dial Transmit Level amp I 14 9 Dial Transmit Type 14 9 Dialer Type 9 20 Directory Location 1 Callback 9 43 Index 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Index Directory Location 1 Callback S67 14 23 disabled commands 9 42 Disconnect 5 3 display revision serial model numbers 14 5 Download Code 10 4 download failure 10 6 download latest firmware 10 6 DSR Control 9 10 9 11 F DSR Control amp S 14 10 DTE connection 2 4 DTE Dialer Type 9 15 DTE Dialer Type amp M amp Q 14 10 DTE Interface 9 7 DTE LL S52 14 21 DTE Local Loopback 9 40 DTE Rate 9 8 same as VF rate 14 26 DTE Rate VF Rate 9 14 DTE Rate VF Rate S90 14 26 DTE Remote Loopback 9 40 DTE RL S51 14 21 DTE status 7 4 DTE side password backspace c
174. gs Sync Leased Answer Originate Mode Default Settings DIAL LINE Dial Line Rate 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 V32t V 32bis Automode Enable Enable N A V 32bis Autorate Enable Enable Enable Dial Transmit Level Permissive Permissive Permissive 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm V 22bis Guard Tone Disable Disable Disable V 32bis Train Long Long Long LEASED LINE Leased Mode N A N A 4 wire LL Answer 4 wire LL Orig Leased Line Rate N A N A 19200 V32t V 32bis Autorate N A N A Enable Leased Transmit Level N A N A 0 dBm 1800 Hz Train Tone N A N A Disable BdLn Auto Orig N A N A Disable Auto Dial Standby N A N A Disable Carrier On Level N A N A 43 dBm Fall Fwd Delay N A N A Disable V 42 MNP BUFFER Error Control Mode V 42 MNP or Buffer N A N A V 42bis Compression Enable N A N A MNP5 Compression Enable N A N A EC Negotiate Buffer Disable N A N A EC Fallback Character N A N A N A Flow Control of DTE CTS to DTE N A N A Flow Control of Modem Disable N A N A XON XOFF Passthrough N A N A N A Modem to Modem Flow Disable N A N A Control Break Buffer Control Keep Data N A N A Send Break Control Data First N A N A Buffer Disconnect Delay 10 seconds N A N A Sync Leased Answer Mode default setting For the Model 3820 the default setting is 2 wire Answer Sync Leased Originate Mode default setting For the Model 3820 the default setting is 2 wire Originate 3810 A2 GB30 20 Nove
175. haracter 9 47 number of tries 9 46 termination character 9 46 DTR Action 9 10 DTR Action amp D 14 7 DTR Alarm Reporting 9 44 DTR Alarm Reporting S77 14 24 DTR Auto Redial 9 24 DTR Cont Repeat 9 19 echo commands 14 4 Edit Password Table 12 6 Edit Strap Group 9 5 End DCP option 9 6 Enhanced Throughput Cellular ETC 9 27 14 9 RJ11 Cellular Adapt 14 26 Entry Wait Time 9 46 equipment customer supplied 2 3 l in modem package 2 2 list H 1 Erase All Passwords 12 11 error control 9 34 Error Control Fallback Character 9 36 Error Control Fallback Character A 14 13 Error Control Mode 9 34 Error Control Mode N 14 12 K Error Control Negotiate Buffer 9 36 Escape Character 9 16 escape character S2 14 16 Escape Guard Time 9 16 Escape Guard Time S12 14 17 escape sequence 14 1 Extended Result Codes 9 17 Factory configuration area 9 1 factory default templates 4 13 Factory Defaults amp F 14 7 Fall Forward Delay 9 28 9 33 Fast Disconnect 9 22 Fast Disconnect S85 14 25 fax modulations supported D 2 operation 13 1 types supported 13 1 features 1 2 firmware download 10 6 firmware release number 14 5 firmware upgrade 10 4 10 6 flow control DTE and modem 14 13 modem to modem 14 12 of DTE 9 36 of modem 9 37 XON XOFF 14 13 Flow Control of DTE 9 36 Flow Control of Modem 9 37 Frame Size VA 14 12 Front Panel Security Access 4 15 hang up 14 4 Hayes AutoS
176. hased from your local electronics store Model 3820 Rear Panel 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 2 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Dial Network Connection The telephone company provides the line termination jacks for the type of service you request You may choose to operate in either Permissive or Programmable mode Advance coordination with the telephone company is suggested when connecting the modem to telephone dial lines PSTN If you operate in the Permissive mode the modem s transmit output level is fixed at approximately 9 dBm The telephone company assumes that the line loss is 3 dBm and no compensation is provided for additional losses The resulting level at the telephone central office could be lower than the nominal 12 dBm provided with Programmable mode A Permissive mode telephone line is usually terminated with a USOC RJ11C jack If you operate in the Programmable mode the telephone company installs a program resistor that adjusts the modem s output level so that the signal entering the telephone company s central office is at the maximum allowable level of 12 dBm Telephone lines for the Programmable mode are usually terminated with a USOC RJ45S jack or an RJ41S jack switched to Programmable NOTE The modem is shipped with the Async Dial factory preset configuration stored in memory This factory preset configures the modem for Permissive mode To operate in Programmable mode you m
177. he AT command is amp TO Self Self performs an internal self test of the modem which takes less than a minute to complete The modem must be offline not connected with another modem otherwise Invalid Command appears This test is not valid in Remote mode and does not appear on the LCD of either modem when in Remote mode To access Self from the Test branch make the following selection Test A Abort a A rr re fr Select Self All LCD cells and DCP status indicators light If the modem passes self test Pass appears on the LCD If it fails Failed appears If the modem fails contact your service representative If Invalid Command appears on the LCD then another test is in progress or the modem is operating on dial lines Select Abort to clear the current test or disconnect to clear the dial lines and then choose Self If the modem receives a ring signal during this test the test is cancelled and the RI Abort message appears To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key AT Command Equivalent The AT command is amp T9 8 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Test Branch Loc Analog Loop Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 3 Figure 8 1 that verifies modem operation as well as the connection between the DTE and modem The modem must be offline to pe
178. he answering modem the modem mutes transmitter output amp Fn Select Factory Default Configuration Options Configure Factory Loads factory configuration options into Active Operating area amp FO Async Dial amp F1 Sync Dial amp F2 Sync Leased Answer amp F3 UNIX Dial amp F4 Sync Leased Originate amp F5 Cellular Mobile amp F6 Cellular PSTN 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 1 6 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands AT se Front Panel Command Description Branch amp Fn cont d If your modem is attached to a cellular telephone use the amp F5 command to configure the modem for cellular communications amp F5 sets the following configuration options AT Option Command Value Maximum Frame Size A4 Error Control Mode N4 Auto Answer Rings S0 3 No Answer Timeout S7 120 No Carrier Disconnect 10 100 V 32bis Train S43 1 V 32bis Autorate S76 3 V 42 ARQ Window Size 89 9 Cellular Enhancements 91 1 If your modem is attached to a normal dial telephone line but sometimes communicates with a modem that is attached to a cellular phone use the amp F6 command amp F6 Cellular PSTN sets the following configuration options AT Option Command Value Transmit Level amp I99 Error Control Mode WA No Answer Timeout S7 120 No Carrier Disconnect 10 100 V 32bis Train S43 1 V 42 ARQ Window Size S89 9 Cellular Enhancements 91 1 The
179. he carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3811 in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier 1 At the rear of the carrier install the rear connector plate Make sure the plate uses the same slot position as that intended for the modem Loosely fasten the plate This allows for slight adjustments later when installing the modem SDU MODEL 3811 MODEM At the front of the carrier hold the modem vertically with the latch on its faceplate in the open position and insert it into the top and bottom card guides of one of the slots numbered 1 16 see Figure 3 2 Slide the modem into the slot aligning the modem with the rear connector plate until the backplane connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the back of the carrier The faceplate latch automatically closes as you push the modem into the carrier To lock the modem into the carrier press the faceplate latch until a click is heard If the carrier is ON the Power LED on the faceplate of the 3811 lights After several seconds the modem completes its power up self test in which all faceplate LEDs light If the modem fails the Alrm LED on the faceplate flashes Return to the rear of the carrier and tighten the rear connector plate 3000 SERIES CARRIER 491 13143 Figure 3 2 Installing a Model 3811 Modem 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 3 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series M
180. he factory default is 1 second AT command is S register S12 n where nis a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments BreakForceEscap Disable Nxt Disable Enable Break Forces Escape Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break character from the DTE Disable A break character is sent to the remote end Enable Modem escapes into AT Command mode and a break character is not sent to the remote end The factory default is Disable AT commands to enable are WO K2 or K4 AT commands to disable are K1 K3 or K5 CommandCharEcho Enable Nxt Enable Disable Command Character Echo Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in Command mode The factory default is Enable AT command to disable Command Data Echo is EO AT command to enable Command Data Echo is E1 CarriageRtn Char 013 ASCI Nxt T 013 ASCI Carriage Return Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The factory default is 13 ASCII carriage return AT command for Carriage Return Character is S register S3 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT 9 16 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 2 3 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options Backspace Char 008 ASCI
181. he local modem s LCD To return to local modem operation select ExitRem Any changes made to configuration options in the remote modem are saved The following conditions can cause Remote branch access to fail e The local modem is not able to communicate with the remote modem because of a poor dial network or leased line connection or the remote modem is not a 3800 Series modem If this 1s the case the status message No Response appears on the LCD e Ifaconnection is established but the remote modem s Access from Remote configuration option is disabled then the status message Access Disabled appears on the LCD e Ifa connection is established but the wrong password is stored the status message Password Invalid appears on the LCD This configuration option must be enabled by the remote user 492 13082 01 Figure 11 1 Top Level Menu of a Remote 3800 Series Modem 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 11 3 Security 1 2 c l A EET 12 1 Oebnate ACCESS SCOUT oaiae sega Reese ne nR Ronde Ee ID els arcte dab PeaM ant aden RE 12 2 Answer Access Sect rieda ie aee Race ec ppc temen Rc oc ead REX RR pe RCNH e ens 12 2 WESide Passwords orienter eere mE PETI de m ES D RU DNe RI EP ere 12 2 IDEA Side Passwords Levencccxdeneek ee meten epe rper noraen 12 3 Combination of VF Side and DTE Side Passwords 002 e eee ee eect eee eee eee 12 3 security Branchli a snie Topey aea sews Ga ead hak Cb ehe e ard ice aS eae rena
182. he modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network 3811 only ON The modem has established a dial connection OFF A dial connection does not exist RI 125 green A ringing signal is being received 3811 only Busy yellow ON The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off hook 3811 only Serv yellow ON The modem is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally assigned 8811 only dial network SQ yellow The receive telephone line signal is degraded TXD 103 green The modem is receiving data from the DTE to transmit ON equals space RXD 104 green Data is being transferred to the DTE ON equals space RTS 105 green RTS signal is ON CTS 106 green CTS signal is ON LSD 109 green The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the DTE DSR 107 green DSR signal is ON 3811 only Rate yellow ON The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the data rate it is configured for 3810 only OFF The modem is connected at its configured data rate Front Panel yellow ON The modem is connected to the carrier s SDCP 3811 only 4 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation DCP LEDs for the standalone Model 3820 are listed The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 4 3 and described in Table 4 2 Table 4
183. hen the Model 3820 is configured for leased line operation this function is not available and is not displayed on the LCD To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Dial Standby J e l 5 em Press the key until Dial Standby or Return to Dial is displayed Select the appropriate function DIAL BACKUP LINE DIAL RETURN STANDBY TO DIAL LEASED LINE FAILURE 496 13081 01 Figure 5 1 Dial Backup 5 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Call Setup Branch Dial Standby A Command Complete A lt or fre rs gt If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode the Dial Standby function forces the modem to leased lines and displays the status message Command Complete Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode the Return to Dial function appears on the LCD Selecting this function forces the modem to dial networks and displays the status message Command Complete AT Command Equivalent There is no AT Command equivalent for Dial Standby or Return to Dial Change Directory Change Directory allows you to enter or modify telephone numbers The modem has nonvolatile memory locations that allow you to store up to 10 telephone numbers Each directory location can accept up to 40 characters this includes the telephone number and dial command modifiers Any telephone number
184. ho Far End Echo displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the remote line termination This value only appears for V 32bis and V 32 modulations NearEcho FarEchDel Far End Echo Delay indicates the roundtrip delay in milliseconds of the far end echo EchoFreqOff Echo Frequency Offset indicates the frequency offset of the far end echo To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the x key AT Command Equivalent There is no AT command equivalent for VF status 7 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Status Branch Identity Identity displays the modem s serial number model number firmware revision level hardware part number and firmware part number Retrieval of this information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement modems and or making firmware upgrades To access Identity from the Status branch make the following selection nos ZA Select Identity Status ZN VF Status Identity gt A Ser 00000000 CA fa fe elie te The modem s serial number is displayed on the LCD s bottom line Press the C key to scroll and view the model number firmware revision level hardware part number and firmware part number Ser Serial number is an 8 digit number that
185. icates DownldOnly Mode Indicates that a local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has failed The modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which only another download attempt is possible Frmware Upgrade Indicates that a local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was successful RemClone Failed Displays on the local modem s LCD and indicates that a remote cloning of firmware has failed Remote Clone OK Displays on the local modem s LCD and indicates that a remote cloning of firmware was successful AT Command Reset Message Indicates Reset by AT command The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ command Direct mode MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12K 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in 4 10 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation Messages listed in Table 4 5 are common operational messages that occur during modem operation These messages normally appear on the s
186. ich is determined by the Pause Time configuration option S8 is equal to 2 seconds This allows a delay between the processing of the phone number by the answering modem and the transmission of the VF side password by the originating modem Some experimentation may be necessary to determine the number of pauses necessary for your call 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 11 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems A DTE side password is entered after the modems have trained but before a normal connection is established The following example illustrates how to enter a DTE side password TYPE PRESS Where abc123 Enter abc123 is a 10 alphanumeric character password Characters used for DTE side passwords are case insensitive DTE side passwords can be from to 6 characters in length If a valid password is entered then the modems connect and data can pass Originate Access Password An Originate Access password is entered by a local user to gain access to a local 3800 Series modem This password is embedded in the AT dial command and cannot be entered from the diagnostic control panel DCP The following example describes how to enter an Originate Access security password TYPE PRESS Where ATD abc 123 T9 800555 1234 Enter ATD is the AT dial command Percent is the start and stop dial string command interrupt characters the Originate Access password must be enclosed by these characters abc123 i
187. ided that the number of tries is set to a value greater than 1 This will continue until the correct password is entered by the originating user or the number of tries allowed is met The factory default is 1 DTE PW TermChar 013 Nxt 013 DTE Password Termination Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to indicate the end of a password or User ID entered by an originating user This character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The factory default is 13 ASCII carriage return This configuration option does not appear if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for No Answer Security 9 46 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 9 2 of 2 Security Configuration Options DTE_PW_BkSpChar 008 Nxt 1 008 DTE Password Backspace Character Sets the character that is used to perform a backspace in security mode This character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The factory default is 08 ASCII backspace Get User ID Disable Nxt Disable Enable Get User ID Determines whether the remote user is prompted for an NMS defined login ID once the modems have completed initial handshaking For consistent operation from the remote user s viewpoint all modems in a modem group must use the same setting Disable The user is prompted only for a password if required by the setting of Answer Security Mode or the configuration of the VF
188. industry standard It uses a defined set of control characters and control character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary coded data between stations in a data communications system A contraction of binary digit A bit which is the smallest unit of information represents the choice between a one or a zero sometimes called mark or space Bits per second Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection A storage device used to compensate for differences in the data flow rate when transmitting data from one device to another A sequence of successive bits usually eight handled as a unit in data transmission Top Level menu branch that contains all the functions necessary to dial telephone numbers stored in directory locations answer incoming calls disconnect calls and save telephone numbers to directory locations The rack mounting that contains 17 slots 1 control slot for an SDU and 16 modem slots See data carrier A modem that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and used at central site operations Up to 16 modems can be installed per carrier with 6 carriers per cabinet An advisory committee Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies Glossary 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Glossary CCITT V 17 CCITT V 22 CCITT V 22bis CCITT V
189. ine rate of the modem falls back to 7200 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated OnFIBKTo96 If the leased line rate of the modem falls back to 9600 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated OnFIBkTo120 If the leased line rate of the modem falls back to 12 000 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated OnFIBkTo144 If the leased line rate of the modem falls back to 14 400 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated This is available only on modems with the V 32terbo feature OnFIBKTo168 If the leased line rate of the modem falls back to 16 800 bps a dial backup attempt will be initiated This is available only on modems with the V 32terbo feature AT command is S36 n S36 0 Disable S36 1 OnFIBkTo48 S36 2 OnFIBkTo72 S36 3 OnFIBkTo96 S36 4 OnFIBkTo120 S36 5 OnFIBkTo144 S36 6 OnFIBkTo168 NOTE Rate Auto Originate is valid only when V 32bis Autorate is enabled S76 0 Auto Redial Nxt Dir_1 Dirs_1 2 Dirs_1 3 Dirs_1 4 Dirs_1 5 Dirs_1 6 Dirs_1 7 Dirs_1 8 Dirs_1 9 Dirs_1 10 Auto Redial Works in conjunction with the Bad Lines Auto Originate and Rate Auto Originate options It allows repeated automatic dial backup attempts by specifying the range of Directory Locations that can be tried The modem must be in Originate mode Dir_1 The modem will use only Directory Location 1 for automatic dial backups Dirs_1 2 The modem will use Directory Location 2 in the event of call failure using Direct
190. ional Ring Indicate The local modem is receiving an incoming ring Test MR The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate Alarm Status Message Indicates Make Busy Indicates the modem is in a Make Busy condition Power On Fail Indicates the modem has failed its Power On Self Test Self Health Fail Indicates a failure in the modem s hardware components Weak Battery Indicates the battery is operating below 2 volts Contact your sales or service representative Normal Call Setup Messages Indicates Off Hook The modem is off hook and waiting to dial a telephone number Dialing The remote modem is ringing Training The modem is training or retraining EC Negotiating The local and remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of error control compatible between both modems Once a level is selected this LCD message disappears Direct mode MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12K 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the
191. ired VF and DTE passwords for use in VF_w _DTE answer security mode Security Database Table Using Palid VESSId and DTE Side Passwords VF and DTE Passwords Index Password Type Assigned to 01 00110001 VF plus DTE User A Denver office 02 user1 DTE Entry User A Logon ID 03 00110002 VF plus DTE User B Denver office 04 ralph DTE Entry User B Logon ID 05 4695873 VF plus DTE Berlin office 06 guest DTE Entry Guest Logon ID 07 4695873 VF plus DTE Berlin office 08 actmgr DTE Entry Account Manager Logon ID 09 350647 VF_plus_DTE User C 10 miami DTE_Entry Miami office 11 00159766 VF_plus_DTE User D 12 miami DTE_Entry Miami office For this password to be valid the VF_plus_DTE password entered must be the one immediately preceding the DTE_Entry password in the table 12 14 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 OVEIVIEW poca bid Seta e ee pax Operation 14 eei metere tpe Overview The procedures for sending and receiving facsimile documents with your modem depend on the fax software you use This chapter does not contain specific procedures but rather information that may make it easier for you to use the documentation that came with your fax software Fax Operation With the fax option installed your modem in combination with your computer and fax software is capable of emulating the functions of a fax machine You can use it to send and receive fax fi
192. irements apply when using DTE passwords if the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode is set to VF amp DTE or VF w DTE Refer to the note following VF plus DTE VF Entry Indicates that this index s password is configured for VF side password entry This selection requires that the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode be set to VF amp DTE VF plus DTE Indicates that both layers of password entry are used with this index s password This location is configured so that the answering modem sends a prompt for the DTE side password after receiving a valid VF side password This setting requires that the Set Answer Security option be set to VF amp DTE or VF w DTE NOTE If the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode is set to VF amp DTE or VF w DTE special requirements apply in order to use passwords with their type set to DTE Entry The originating caller must first enter a valid VF password If the VF password entered is configured in the security database with the type VF plus DTE the user is then required to enter a password configured in the database table with the type DTE Entry In the case of VF w DTE mode the DTE Entry password must immediately follow the VF plus DTE password in the password table Edit PsWd xxxx Nxt yyyyyyyy or zzzzzz Edit Password Allows the password associated with this index to be changed NOTE This security option does not appear if the Password Type option is set
193. is disabled Also is displayed if the local modem has a firmware release prior to Release 3 0 and the remote modem has Release 3 0 or greater installed with either Answer Access Security or Originate Access Security enabled In this case both security methods must be disabled in the remote modem to achieve the download The local and remote modems passwords do not match Password Invalid Correct the problem and attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning Download session the following screens are displayed RemClone Status A Initializing ness laj L2 8 Cm RemClone Status Bank 1 xxxx yyyy C CA G 8 L8 Cm 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 10 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems As data banks are transferred the local and remote LCD s bottom line displays the status of the download process and the number of records sent versus the total number of records for that bank RemClone OK ZN Call Setup 3 C3 C93 CJ 09 If the download is successful the local modem displays Remote Clone OK and the remote modem displays Frmware Upgrade If the download took place over the dial network the modems disconnect when the download is complete If unsuccessful RemClone Failed is displayed on the LCD s top line Attempt another
194. is character The modems will connect in Buffer mode no error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to the DTE When comparing incoming characters for a match against the EC fallback character the modem ignores parity The factory default is 13 ASCII NOTE This configuration option is only available if EC Negotiate Buffer is configured for Disab amp Switch AT command is An where n is a value from 0 to 127 Flw Cntl of DTE CTS to DTE Nxt CTS to DTE Disable XON XOFF Flow Control of DTE Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE CTS to DTE Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the DTE should start and stop sending data Disable The modem cannot control the flow of data from the DTE XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem sends XON and XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop the flow of data The factory default is CTS to DTE AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q5 and Q6 AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q4 AT commands for CTS to DTE are Q2 and Q3 This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group for more on Async Sync Mode 9 36 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20
195. is set to DTR Direct 1 then DTR Action behaves as CT108 1 Connect Data Set to Line For Async Dial Sync Leased and UNIX Dial Ignore is the factory default For Sync Dial Stndrd RS232 is the factory default AT command for Ignore is amp DO AT command for Off CmdMode is amp D1 AT command for Standard RS232 is amp D2 AT command for OffzReloadStrp is amp D3 AT command for CtrlsOnHook is amp D4 AT command for CnirlsTXMute is amp D5 DSR Control Forced On Nxt Forced On Stndrd RS232 WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR On Early Delay To Data DialBkToggle Data Data Set Ready Control DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for operation Forced On Forces DSR output ON constantly This is usually used for leased line applications and when the DTE requires DSR to always be ON Standard RS232 Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE The modem raises DSR when it begins the handshake process DSR lowers upon disconnect The modem may not be ready to receive data until DSR CTS and LSD are active An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data An Off state indicates that the modem is not ready to receive data and the DTE will not send data to the modem During a Local Analog Loop and a Remote Digital Loop DSR is ON Wink When Disconnect DSR is normally forced ON but is turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR When the modem recei
196. isconnect is D2 AT command for Follows DTR is D3 RTS CTS Delay 0 msec Nxt Omsec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec Request to Send Clear to Send Delay RTS CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data NOTE For this configuration option to be valid both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be set for Stndrd RS232 If RTS Action is set for Ignore RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no effect The factory default is 0 milliseconds AT command is S register S26 n where nis a value from 0 to 255 in 10 millisecond increments 9 12 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 1 6 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options LSD Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Sim Cntrl Car DTR DiscOff BridgeRetrain Line Signal Detect Control LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem It is normally turned Off to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect threshold Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem s carrier signal LSD turn
197. ived Enter a value from 1 to 255 seconds Factory setting is 45 seconds Configure WEditLine Dialer 14 16 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 2 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S8 Pause Time for the Dial Modifier Configure WEditLine Dialer Register determines how long in seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the Dial command string Enter a value from 0 to 255 seconds Factory setting is 2 seconds 10 No Carrier Disconnect Configure Edit Line Dialer Register determines how long in tenths of seconds the modem allows the carrier signal to be off before disconnecting the call Enter a value from 0 to 254 in 0 1 second increments A value of 255 disables this register Factory setting is 20 2 seconds 12 Escape Guard Time Configure Edit DTE Dialer Register sets the value in 20 millisecond increments for the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters Enter a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments For example the factory setting of 50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second Factory setting is 50 1 second 18 Test Timeout Configure Edit Tests Register sets the duration in seconds for the modem tests This automatically cancels any test in progress after the time
198. l Backup configuration option set for Disable and the other has it set to Enable Modem does not switch back to leased line operation Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled C 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Technical Specifications ados E b ea Rae dey b a de eee eRe QUE PL EA sa Ra RSS D 1 Table D 1 shows the technical specifications for the 3800 Series modems Table D 1 1 of 4 Technical Specifications for 3800 Series Modems Specifications Description APPROVALS 115 Vac 60 Hz only FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 UL Model 3810 and Model 3820 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier CSA Model 3810 and Model 3820 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier DOC Model 3810 and Model 3820 Model 3811 Class A Registration Number See label on modem Listed to UL 1950 Recognized to UL 478 Certified to CSA C22 2 No 950 Certified to CSA C22 2 No 950 Certification Number See label on modem Certification Number See label on modem 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 D 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table D 1 2 of 4 Technical Specifications for 3800 Series Modems Specifications Description COMPATIBILITY DIAL LINE MODULATIONS V 32terbo 19 200 16 800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps CCITT V 22bis
199. les in communication with another fax modem or with a standard fax machine These fax files are images turned into the sort of data that can be stored in your computer Fax machines and fax modems use special protocols different from those used by standard modems The device you intend to communicate with must be compatible with your modem which means that it must be capable of using the same protocol Your 3800 Series modem supports the Class 2 EIA TIA SP 2388 Fax Operation 1 3 e Your modem must be online with a compatible fax modem or fax machine e You must have configured your modem according to the specifications of your fax software manual For example Some fax software requires that the modem have Auto Answer disabled You can set this using the AutoAnswerRing configuration option under the Line Dialer branch or by issuing the ATSO 0 command Some fax software requires that the modem use software flow control You can set this using the FlwCntlofDTE and FlwCntlof Mdm configuration options under the V 42 MNP Buffer branch or by issuing an AT Q1 command DTR Action should be set for standard RS232 D operation Use the Stndrd_RS232 setting of DTR Action in the DTE Interface configuration options group or the AT amp D2 command LSD Line Signal Detect Control should be set for standard RS232 D operation Use the Group III fax using V 17 V 29 or V 27ter modulations Stndrd_RS232 setti
200. lf test 8 2 Send Break Control 9 38 serial number 14 5 Service Line 10 3 Set Access Control 12 5 Set Administrative Password 12 10 Set Answer Security 12 8 Set Originate Security 12 9 setting factory defaults 4 13 Speaker Control 9 42 10 2 Speaker On Off M 14 5 Speaker Volume 9 43 Speaker Volume L 14 5 status 4 8 Status branch 7 2 status indicators 4 4 Stop Bits 9 9 Store Telephone Numbers amp Z 14 11 Straps When Disconnected 9 42 Straps When Disconnected S88 14 26 Sync Mode amp M amp Q 14 10 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Index 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems T W Talk mode 6 2 window size 14 26 Talk Data branch 6 1 technical specifications D 1 telephone connection 2 7 telephone numbers entering 5 5 X Test branch 8 2 Test Timeout 9 40 Test Timeout S18 14 17 Tests amp T 14 11 top level menu 4 8 Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay 9 38 Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay S49 14 21 Transmit Clock Source 9 13 Transmit Clock Source amp X 14 11 transmit level D 3 troubleshooting C 1 XON XOFF flow control X 14 13 XON XOFF Passthrough 9 37 unlocking the DCP 4 15 upgrade instructions 10 6 V 22bis Guard Tone 9 27 V 22bis Guard Tone amp G 14 8 V 25bis Autorate S76 14 24 V 25bis Coding 9 18 V 25bis Coding S62 14 23 V 25bis dialing commands and responses F 1 V 25bis Idle Character S63 14 23 V 25bis
201. lines Model 3820 a 2 wire standalone unit capable of operation on dial or 2 wire leased lines 1 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3810 and 3820 Installation uu ruv PC 2 1 3800 Series Modem Package cu oe ene hee mede E ER RS S x RO aye acr le qr Ree e 2 2 Customer Supplied Equipment 2 e RR e eher RAG RE EET RES 2 3 Model 3810 or Model 3820 Modem Installation 0 0 cece cee eee ee 2 3 Connecting Model 3810 and Model 3820 Modems with Supplied Cables 0 2 4 DTE ComnneetiOh synene sap ee rer eme pae ae aes ee ead ed D e PU epp 2 4 Dial Network Connection ces xe eate RR tede pc epo cgit ege op ore dee goo ee e 2 6 Model 3810 Dial Li5e Connect On ac eaa eere tee da pr erm tre Rot Eee ace hdd 2 6 Model 3820 DialIane ConnecHon sede rene bee 8 GNSS IERI eMERR Se E so Meee eet EE ENR 2 6 Model 3810 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection 00 0 cece e cee eese 2 7 Model 3820 2 Wire Leased Line Connecti stegs 5 cdg ccd edoaw tb emer Rr pbc aerate Eee pare ears 2 7 Model 3810 and Model 3820 Telephone Connection cic ccs god Ret Rt IER eee ee a 2 7 Dial Network Management System Connection llle hene 2 7 AC Power Transformer Connection ss senesi rore rem et pce Rem acie ese Rare Seded p rece 2 7 Modem Power UP cir e e pre aids Ped ne ee n ES RH e EIER Pa cock se e e py s 2 8 Removing and Replacing Model 3810 and Model 3820 Modems sese een 2 8 Overvie
202. manded by the DTE to disconnect or after the modem detects a line disconnect Through the DCP the available settings are Disable 10sec and 60sec Disable means that the disconnect occurs immediately The default is Disable Disable Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers 10 60 sec Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting In both cases 10 sec and 60 sec the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers NOTE This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set for DirectMode AT command is S register S39 n where nis 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments Max Frame Size Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16 Sets the maximum frame size for V 42 and MNP For V 42 operation 128 is the maximum value and a higher value has the effect of setting the frame size to 128 For MNP 64 is the minimum value and any lower value has the effect of setting the frame size to 64 For cellular applications at least one of the modems should be set to 32 AT command is A M0 64 A1 128 A2 192 A3 256 A4 32 A5 16 CellularEnhance End Disable Enable Enables or disables V 42 Cellular Enhancement mode Disable The modem uses standard techniques for V 42 operation Enable Cellular enhancements are enabled The modem is still compatible with modems that
203. mber 1996 G 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table G 1 4 of 4 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Option Async Dial and UNIX Dial Default Settings Sync Dial Default Settings Sync Leased Answer Originate Mode Default Settings Address NMS Call Messages Network Position Call Connect amp Progress N A Call Connect amp Progress N A TESTS DTE RL CT140 Disable Disable Disable DTE LL CT141 Disable Disable Disable Test Timeout Disable Disable Disable Receive Remote Loopback Enable Enable Enable V 54 Address Disable Disable Disable V 54 Device Type N A N A N A MISC Straps When Disconnect No Change No Change No Change Speaker Control On Until Carrier On Until Carrier On Until Carrier Speaker Volume Medium Medium Medium Access from Remote Enable Enable Enable Remote Access Password 00000000 00000000 00000000 Directory Location Callback Disable Disable Disable Network Management 256 256 256 Call Connect amp Progress Tributary Control SECURITY Entry Wait Time VF Prompt Type DTE Password Tries DTE Password Termination Character Password Backspace Character Answer Security Mode Originate Security Mode 20 sec 2nd Dial Tone 1 013 ASCII 008 ASCII See footnote See footnote 20 sec 2nd Dial Tone 1 013 ASCII 008 ASCII See footnote See footnote 20 sec 2nd Dial Tone 1 013 ASCII 008 ASCII See footnote See footnote
204. med by customer service personnel only Clone To Remote This function allows you to transfer an exact copy of the local modem s firmware to a remote modem Before using Clone to Remote perform the following Make sure the 3800 Series modems have an established dial network connection using either V 32bis or V 32 modulation or a leased line connection using either V 33 V 32bis V 32 or V 29 modulation e Make sure the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled e Make sure the password Remote Access Password configuration option is the same in both the local and remote modems For an example of how to change the password refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 9 To access Download Code from the Control branch make the following selections Control A Download Code A e E899 el C9 pus Press the key until Download Code appears Press any function key to select Download Code Download Code gt A Clone_to_Remote A m M le le Cm Press any function key to select Clone_to_Remote WARNING The modem begins a transfer of its own program to the remote modem This process takes the communications link out of service for several minutes depending upon the data rate of the link 14 400 bps 10 minutes 9600 bps 15 minutes 4800 bps 30 minutes If the Clone to Remote process is star
205. milar to the AT amp Z command The PRN command format is PRN x n Where x is the directory location 1 10 n is the telephone number Request List of Stored Numbers RLN The Request List of Stored Numbers RLN command displays telephone numbers stored in the modem s directory location If the RLN command is entered without specifying a directory location then all directory locations and telephone numbers are displayed If a directory location is entered then only that telephone number are displayed The RLN command format is RLN which displays all directory locations Or RLNx Where x is a directory location List Stored Number Response LSN LSN is a response to an RLN command issued by the DTE If a directory location is specified then the telephone number for that location is displayed If no directory location is specified then all telephone numbers stored in memory are displayed The LSN response format is LSNx n Where x is the directory location n is the telephone number 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 F 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Command Response A Command Response indicates that the command entered was a valid or invalid entry Command Response includes Valid VAL and Invalid INV Valid VAL The VAL response indicates that the modem has accepted the V 25bis command issued by the DTE VAL is similar to the AT result code OK Invalid INV The INV response in
206. mmands CCITT V 25bis commands or RS 366 A Model 3811 only Configuration of software options via the AT Command set or DCP High speed transmission using asynchronous synchronous or UNIX devices over full or half duplex dial networks or 2 wire 4 wire leased lines Complement of self tests local and remote loopbacks including CCITT compatible V 54 Four factory defined configurations and two user defined configuration areas Availability in either the 2 wire 4 wire standalone and carrier mount or the 2 wire only standalone models Originate Security and three Answer Security modes Directory 1 Callback capability Dial Access Security which guards against unwanted user access to the host DTE Hayes Autosync support Options The 3800 Series modems also may have the following optional features Diagnostic control monitor and call statistic capabilities through the COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS Class 2 Fax modulations CCITT V 17 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 bps V 29 9600 7200 bps and V 27ter 4800 2400 bps COMSPHERE 3800 Series Models The COMSPHERE 3800 Series modem is available in several models Model 3810 a 4 wire 2 wire standalone unit capable of operation on 2 wire dial or 4 wire leased or 2 wire leased lines Model 3811 a 4 wire 2 wire carrier mounted modem for installation into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier it is capable of operation on dial or 4 wire leased or 2 wire leased
207. mode or Dial Backup mode Enable Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE The modem s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect Disable Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE Modem will not transmit a long space disconnect For Async Dial UNIX Dial and Sync Leased Enable is the factory default For Sync Dial Disable is the factory default AT command for Disable is YO AT command for Enable is Y1 9 22 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 3 4 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options No Carrier Disc 2sec Nxt 2sec 5sec Disable 10sec 20sec No Carrier Disconnect If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem it disconnects the call This configuration option determines how long carrier is Off before the modem disconnects Loss of carrier is one method of disconnecting a call 2 5 10 20 sec Modem disconnects if carrier turns Off for more than 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds or 20 seconds Disable Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns Off The factory default is 2sec AT command is S register S10 n where nis 255 for disable or 0 to 254 in 0 1 second increments for enable No Data Disc Disable Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min No Data Disconnect Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted or received within a specified amount of time Disabl
208. n 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface Disable Disregards CT111 Rate Control Fallback1 Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT111 is Off Valid only for V 32bis modulation Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate Fallback2 Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate NOTE This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V32bis Autorate and V32bis Automode configuration options The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S61 n where nis 0 for Disable 1 for Fallback1 and 2 for Fallback2 DTE Rate VF Disable End Disable Enable DTE Rate VF Rate Forces the data rate of the connection between the DTE computer and the modem to be the same as the VF telephone line rate Disable The DTE rate is the value of the Async DTE Rate configuration option Enable The DTE rate is identical with the VF rate The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S90 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 9 14 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch
209. n Chapter 14 Verify that the DTE has a valid character format Valid format consists of 8 data bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even odd mark or space parity Verify that the DTE s data rate 57 600 bps 300 bps is supported by the modem Refer to Async DTE Rate configuration option in the DTE Interface section of Chapter 9 If using a PC verify that the modem is attached to the correct communications port Table C 3 1 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action Modem does not receive a dial tone Attach the telephone directly to the wall outlet to verify that a dial tone exists Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem s rear jack labeled Dial Modem does not go off hook and answer an incoming call Verify that the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option S register 0 is set to a value other than 0 disable Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem verify that the modem s DTR Action configuration option is set for Ignore Refer to the DTE Dialer section of Chapter 9 Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the modem Modem goes off hook answers but does not connect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE is echoed back to the DTE Verify that the originating modem is compatible Verify that originating modem recognizes your modem s answer to
210. n and allows an operator to manage its operation This is a generic term used for both the standalone and carrier mounted models See SDCP The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed telephone number A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial network See PSTN A function available when the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode allowing the modem to switch back to lease line operation while still maintaining the dial line connection A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone number Glossary 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Glossary digital signal directory location DOC download DTE edit area EIA EIA 232 D EIA RS 366 A EPROM error control escape sequence extended result codes fax modem fax software FCC full duplex function key A signal composed of only two discrete values representing the binary digits O and 1 Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers Each directory location can have up to 40 characters entered Canadian Department of Communication A process that transfers modem firmware from a locally attached PC to a modem or allows the cloning of firmware from a local modem to a remote modem Also the process of moving data from a host computer to an at
211. n is more efficient than asynchronous transmission One of two dialing methods in which telephone numbers are sent as tones across the telephone lines The very top of the menu tree that displays modem status and all Top Level menu branches A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the VF line Underwriter s Laboratories Inc A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in a UNIX dial network Universal Service Ordering Codes Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal A character that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Glossary 9 Index A Repeat Last Command 14 3 Abort Test branch 8 2 ac power connection 2 7 requirements D 2 Access from Remote 9 43 Access From Remote S55 14 22 Active Operating configuration area 9 1 Active Saved configuration area 9 1 Administrative Password 12 5 12 10 Answer 5 3 Answer Access security 12 2 Answer Access Security Mode 9 47 Answer Security 12 8 ARQ Window Size Increase 14 26 Async Mode amp M amp Q 14 10 AT Command Mode 9 18 AT Command Mode S84 14 25 AT commands H V 42bis Compression 9 35 14 14 amp C LSD Control 9 13 14
212. nating caller via the AT command set the DCP or manually with an attached telephone A VF side password can be entered with the AT dial command The following examples illustrate two ways to enter a VF side password TYPE ATDT5551234W 12345678 or ATDP5551234T 12345678 PRESS Enter Where ATD is the AT dial command P and T are Pulse dial and Tone DTMF dial modifiers 5551234 is the phone number 5551234 is the phone number W is the second dial tone dial modifiers is the wait for quiet answer dial modifiers 12345678 is the password VF side passwords must consist of 1 8 decimal digits is the password terminator character NOTE While pulse dial can be used to originate the call DTMF tones must be used for the password This can be accomplished by using the P and T modifiers appropriately Refer to the Dial command in Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers for more information about modifiers Some originating modems may not recognize the W modifier as a wait for second dial tone If your call disconnects due to a VF Password Timeout or an Unknown VF Password first verify that the answering 3800 Series modem s VF Prompt Type is set for 2nd Dial Tone Next verify that the Dial Tone Detect configuration option in the originating modem is enabled Third insert several Pause modifiers into the dial string instead of the W modifier For the 3800 Series modem each Pause wh
213. nating dialer Unknown DTEpswd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the DTE passwords received from the remote DTE were invalid No Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial command did not contain an originate access password Unknown VF PsWd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the modem received an invalid VF password DTEpswd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE Inval Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate password in the AT dial command was not valid DTR Dial Blocked Appears if DTR dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled DTR dialing is not permitted when security is enabled SecurityBlocked Appears only when the modem is in base mode a mode that occurs during a firmware download and Answer Access Security is enabled In this case the access verification capabilities are not available and the modem does not pass data to the DTE under any circumstances 4 12 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation Selecting Factory Configuration Options After the modem passes the power up self test configure it for operation using one of the factory preset config
214. ne Verify that originating modem supports your modem s modulation schemes The 3800 Series modem recognizes CCITT V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21 Bell 212A and Bell 103J The 3800 Series modem does not support other vendors proprietary modulation schemes Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the originating modem to see if they connect C 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Troubleshooting Table C 3 2 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action Originate Mode Verify that the modem s DTE Dialer configuration option is set to the correct setting either AT DTR Dialing V 25bis Async V 25bis Bisync or V 25bis HDLC Modem does not go off hook and begin dialing If using AT Dialing refer to the Table C 2 Modem DTE Connection If using DTR Dialing verify the telephone number stored in directory location 1 and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a dial If using V 25bis Async verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit and the carriage return and line feed are used as command terminators If using V 25bis Bisync verify that the correct character format uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block If using V 25bis HDLC verify that the correct character format uses flag add
215. nes the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the dial command string NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 2 4 6 8 10 or 20 values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to 255 seconds The factory default is 2sec AT command is S register S8 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 1 second increments NoAnswer Timout 45sec Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec 120sec No Answer Abort Time out Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call attempt when no answer tone is received NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 30 45 60 or 120 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 seconds The factory default is 45sec AT command for No Answer Timeout is S register S7 n where nis a value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 21 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 3 3 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options Fast Disconnect Disable Nxt Disable Enable Fast Disconnect Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Disable The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space disconnect This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a disconnection Enable Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem
216. ng is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment 3 Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered 4 Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord 5 Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel 6 General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer 7 When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult
217. ng of LSD Control in the Before you can send or receive a fax the following must be true e Your modem s firmware must support the fax option e You must have fax software installed on your DTE Interface configuration options group or the AT amp C1 command Data should be buffered during Error Control EC negotiation Use the Enable setting of EC Negotiate Bufr in the V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options group or the AT C1 computer command e Your fax software must support Class 2 fax 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 13 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems There are no Diagnostic Control Panel DCP functions unique to fax operation If your fax software requires that you change the configuration of your modem see the appropriate sections of Chapter 9 Configure Branch The DCP is disabled during fax operation Your fax software uses AT commands to tell the modem what to do These commands and the replies your modem makes such as OK may be displayed on your computer terminal during fax operation but this depends on your software You do not have to issue AT commands yourself unless you use AT commands to configure the modem For more information about fax operation see the manual that came with your fax software 13 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers d OVERVIEW lolerpenekssenk Ree hee ede sees ls De ch gre x ey eRe EE UR E LAE RH UN 14 1 Operae WI
218. ntrol Sum A AJ le BB 7 Press the key until Security appears Select Security Set Access Control allows you to configure critical parameters contained within the security database table that control dial access security These parameters are protected by an Administrative Password which is an 8 digit decimal number Set Access Control contains the Edit Password Table Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password security configuration groups These groups do not appear on the LCD until the correct Administrative Password is entered Aaministrative Password The Administrative Password is an 8 digit decimal number password that allows only authorized users to access Security branch functionality This password must be entered every time you access the Security branch This feature is shipped from the factory with the Administrative Password set to 00000000 Once the correct Administrative Password is entered the Edit Password Table Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password groups can be displayed on the LCD To enter your Administrative Password from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Security A Set_Access_Ctrl To x le bg L8 CR Select Set Access Ctrl from the Security branch Admin Password A Ent CAS tJ 08 5 Cm 100000000 The Administrative Password appears
219. odel 3810 or 3820 modem that attaches to the front of a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installed at eye level into one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier it controls and monitors modems in all the carriers in the cabinet A single SDCP can control up to 8 carriers with a total of 128 modems Shared Diagnostic Unit A circuit card installed in Slot 0 of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier that provides an interface between an optional SDCP and or network management and Model 3811 modems An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to provide the SDCP and network management interfaces to the dial modems in the carrier It translates the network management protocol to the devices in the carrier and routes incoming messages to the appropriate slots Internal storage areas that contain information affecting the modem parameters A factory preset configuration area containing configuration options most often used in synchronous dial networks Glossary 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Glossary synchronous transmission tone dialing Top Level menu training UL UNIX Dial USOC VF XOFF XON Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals Characters are sent at a fixed rate This type of transmissio
220. odel 3811 7 6 inches 19 4 cm Model 3810 and Model 3820 0 9 inches 2 3 cm Model 3811 12 1 inches 30 8 cm Model 3810 and Model 3820 13 4 inches 34 0 cm Model 3811 TRANSMIT LEVEL Dial Line Leased Line Permissive 9 dBm Programmable transmit level defined by TELCO 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements TELEPHONE INTERFACE Dial Line Connectivity Models 3810 and 3820 Model 3811 RJ11C Permissive RJ45S Programmable RJ27X Programmable 50 pin connector RJ21X Permissive 50 pin connector RJ11C Permissive Service Line 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 D 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table D 1 4 of 4 Technical Specifications for 3800 Series Modems Specifications Description LEASED LINE CONNECTIVITY Model 3810 Model 3820 Model 3811 JM8 6 pin center pair leased jack Requires 125 0054 1531 for JM8 connection 50 pin mass termination VOICE FREQUENCY LINE REQUIREMENTS 2 wire dial PSTN or 4 wire 2 wire leased line DATA RATES Dial Line 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 or 300 0 bps Leased Line 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 4800 or 2400 bps Fax 14 400 9600 7200 4800 or 2400 bps ERROR CONTROL CCITT V 42 MNP 4 2 DATA COMPRESSION CCITT V 42bis MNP Class 5 D 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Pin Assignments OVERVIEW TRETEN E 1 EIA 232 D Pin JASSIODIDSDE oo ade raced
221. odel number I5 Displays the part number of the circuit card I6 Displays the firmware release number I9 Displays 3 digit firmware revision number same as 11 110 n Changes the value of the product code displayed by the IO command n is a number from 0 to 4 110 0 sets product code to 144 110 1 sets product code to 240 110 2 sets product code to 480 110 3 sets product code to 960 110 4 sets product code to 120 111 Performs a checksum of the modem s firmware and displays the results in hexadecimal There is no DCP equivalent of this command 119 Displays the entire firmware revision level Ln Speaker Volume Control Speaker LO Selects low volume Configure Edit Misc L1 Selects low volume L2 Selects medium volume L3 Selects high volume Mn Speaker On Off Control Speaker MO Speaker always off Configure YEditMisc M1 Speaker on until carrier signal is detected M2 Speaker always on O Return to Online or Data Mode None Returns modem to Data mode from Online Command mode P Pulse Dial Configure Edit Line Sets the modem for pulse dial mode Dialer Qn Result Codes Configure Edit DTE Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE Dialer Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE Q2 Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to the DTE Required for most UNIX applications Sr n Change S Register None Changes contents of S register where ris the S register and nis the new value Sr Display S Re
222. odems If the modem is to communicate with an installed SDCP install the modem as described above and perform the following steps 1 Press the Select key on the SDCP The cursor appears in the carrier selection entry Press the F1 f or F2 J key until the carrier number you want appears on the LCD The carrier number selection has a range of to 8 since a single SDCP can control a configuration of up to eight carriers This is only possible if the SDU is installed Press the gt key to position the cursor on the slot selection entry Press the F1 f or F2 J key until the slot number 1 16 you want appears on the LCD Ignore the AB designator that appears on the LCD since it is not applicable to the 3800 Series modems Press the Select key to place the SDCP in direct communication with the selected modem The LCD displays the Top Level menu for the selected modem In addition the Front Panel LED on the modem s faceplate and the OK LED on the SDCP light Once you have determined that the modem is installed properly and completed its power up self test rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers the faceplate latch Figure 3 3 This prevents the modem from accidently being removed once it is installed in a carrier Configure the modem as described in the Selecting Factory Configuration Options section in Chapter 4 CIRCUIT CARD GUIDE CLOSED
223. odes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears B 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Overview Overview This appendix points out basic problems that can occur Troubleshooting character loss random errors or constant format errors use the loopback tests described in Chapter 8 Test when operating a 3800 Series modem Use Tables C 1 in your system by using the process of elimination If through C 6 to check out these problems If you are problems continue to occur contact your service having data communication difficulties such as periodic representative Table C 1 Modem Health Branch With these tests you can usually isolate the fault Symptom Action Modem did not pass power up self test Contact your service representative Power LED does not light LCD does not display Make sure the modem s ON Off switch is in the ON position Make sure the ac power transformer is connected to the ac power receptacle If Power LED and or LCD do not operate contact your service representative A problem is suspected after the power up self test Perform a self test via the modem s DCP or type AT amp T9 if using AT commands
224. of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options NetMngmiAddress 256 Nxt 256 Network Management Address Determines the address used when accessing a locally attached modem from the 6700 Series NMS This configuration option is ignored by remote modems Address values range from 001 to 256 The factory default is 256 AT command is S register S75 n where nis a value from 0 to 255 001 to 256 NMS Call Msgs CallCnct amp Prg Nxt CallCnct amp Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly NMS Call Messages Determines if modem status and or call summary information is sent to the 6700 Series NMS The modem can itemize status such as CallProgress messages or it can report a summary of activity such as Call Connect messages to the NMS Call Connect amp Progress Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS Disable Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS Call Connect Only The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of these statistics to the NMS The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports Call Progress Only The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS These messages include any events that can display on the LCD The factory default is CallCnct amp Prg AT command is S register S66 n where nis 0 for Call Connect amp Progress 1 for Disable 2 for Call Connect Only and 3 f
225. onnected back to back NOTE This configuration option is only available if V54 Address is enabled The factory default is Peripheral AT command is S register S54 n where nis 0 for Peripheral and 1 for Intermediate 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 41 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Misc Table 9 8 shows each Misc Miscellaneous configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the The Miscellaneous configuration options determine Async Dial factory default setting the default value if the specifics for various functions including network modem is just being installed shown following the management parameters and remote modem access colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 8 1 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options StrapsWhenDisc No Change Nxt No Change Reload RelodNoATChg Straps When Disconnected Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications No Change Configuration options do not change upon disconnect Reload The Active Operating configuration area which controls modem operation is reloaded from the Active Saved configuration area when a disconnect occurs
226. ons V54 Address Disable Nxt Disable Address Values V 54 Address Determines which remote 3800 Series modem is placed into a remote loopback test This can be either a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback This type of addressing can be used for extended data circuits tail circuits Disable This is used for normal point to point dial and leased line networks Address Values 01 03 05 07 09 OB OD OF 11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 2B 2D 2F 33 35 37 3B 3D SF 55 57 5B 5F 6F 77 or 7F This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a loopback test This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems used in extended data circuits tail circuits can be commanded to loopback CAUTION Selecting an address will disable any remote loopback that can be commanded from a remote modem The DTE must now control loopback via CT140 and supply the address The factory default is Disable AT command for Disable is S register S53 0 AT command for V 54 Address is S register S53 n where n is a value from 1 to 34 V54 Device Type Peripheral End Peripheral Intermediate V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network Peripheral The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back to back with another modem Intermediate The modem is either of the two modems c
227. or Call Progress Only NMS DTR Alarm Disable Nxt Disable Enable NMS DTR Alarm Determines whether an NMS DTE alarm report is generated when DTR is off Disable The state of DTR does not cause an alarm condition to be reported Enable A DTE alarm condition is reported to the NMS controller in the Device Health amp Status message if DTR is off for more than 10 seconds The alarm condition is reported as inactive after DTR is on for 3 seconds Factory templates do not set NMS DTR Alarm AT Command to Disable is S register S77 0 AT Command to Enable is S register S77 1 This configuration option only appears if the 6700 Series NMS option is installed 9 44 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 8 4 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options NetworkPosition Tributary Nxt Tributary Control Network Position Identification Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem NOTE This configuration option is only applicable for leased line network management applications For the Model 3810 and Model 3820 Tributary is the factory default For the Model 3811 Control is the factory default AT command for Tributary is S74 0 AT command for Control is S74 1 CellulrRJ11Adpt Disable End Disable Enable Cellular RJ11 Adapt Allows the modem to support an RJ11 connection to a 3 watt phone It also causes the modem to transmit the ETC 1
228. or control Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 B 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table B 1 2 of 2 Result Codes Numbers 1 Numbers 2 Word Description 21 11 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 22 12 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 23 16 CONNECT 12000 EC Connection at 12 000 bps with error control 24 13 CONNECT 14400 EC Connection at 14 400 bps with error control 25 17 CONNECT 16800 EC Connection at 16 800 bps with error control 26 15 CONNECT 7200 EC Connection at 7200 bps with error control 27 5 CONNECT 1200 EC Connection at 1200 bps with error control 28 28 CONNECT 38400 Connection at 38 400 bps 29 14 CONNECT 19200 EC Connection at 19 200 bps with error control 30 30 CONNECT 57600 Connection at 57 600 bps 32 32 CONNECT 76800 Connection at 76 800 bps 34 34 CONNECT 115200 Connection at 115 200 bps Appears when the Extended Result C
229. ors one providing an EIA RS 232 DTE interface and one providing an EIA RS 366A DTE interface The Model 3811 derives ac power from the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s backplane which is a common bus to all devices installed in the carrier The user interface to any Model 3811 is through the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature similar to the DCPs on the Model 3810 and Model 3820 For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 4 DCP Operation The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has a total of 17 slots The first slot Slot 0 is reserved for the Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU while the remaining 16 slots can house up to 16 Model 3811 modems or for mixed networks a combination of Model 3811 modems and Model 3611 Data Service Units DSUs An SDU is a circuit card that provides SDCP and network management interfaces to modems and DSUs installed in the carrier SDUs are only required if a single SDCP is used by multiple COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carriers in a cabinet or if a network management system NMS is used For more details on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 3 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems FACEPLATE Status Pwr Alrm 142 Q Test O Dial 125 RI Busy Q Serv Osa O Front Panel O EIA 232 V 24 REAR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR PLATE EIA 232 V 24 EDGE
230. ory Location 1 Dirs 1 3 The modem will use Directory Location 3 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries Dirs 1 10 The modem will use Directory Location 10 in the event of call failure using the preceding entries AT command is S register S35 n 35 0 Use Directory Location 1 S35 1 Use Directory Locations 1 2 S35 2 Use Directory Locations 1 3 35 3 Use Directory Locations 1 4 35 9 Use Directory Locations 1 10 9 32 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 5 5 of 5 Leased Line Configuration Options AutoDialStandby Disable Nxt Disable 15min 30min 1hr 4hr Test 2min Advi5min Adv30min Advihr AdvTest2min Automatic Dial Standby Permits a modem operating on dial lines regardless of the method of dialing origination to check the quality of the leased lines periodically and if they are good to disconnect from the dial lines and resume operations on the leased lines This configuration option is not available on the Model 3820 The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option These intervals are 15 minutes 1 hour and 4 hours The normal settings cause a lapse of data flow on the dial line while the leased line connection is checked The Advanced settings allow data flow to continue without interruption while the leased line is evaluated If Advanced settings are used then both modems mu
231. ous page Secondary Prim data blckd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using Remote Mode Set Access Ctrl Reset Security Admin P assword Speaker EditPassWdTable Set_Orig_Secur Set Answer Sec Set Admin PsWd l Make_Busy Download Code or RemoveMakeBusy Reset Service_Line or DiscServLine Only appears if optional dial access security feature is installed 495 14436c 01 A 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Result Codes Table B 1 1 of 2 Result Codes Numbers 1 Numbers 2 Word Description 0 0 OK Command executed 1 1 CONNECT Modem connected to line 2 2 RING Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line 3 3 NO CARRIER Modem lost or does not detect carrier signal or does not detect answer tone 4 4 ERROR Invalid command 5 5 CONNECT 1200 Connection at 1200 bps 6 6 NO DIALTONE No dial tone detected 7 7 BUSY Busy or trunk busy signal detected 8 8 NO ANSWER No quiet answer 10 10 CONNECT 2400 Connection at 2400 bps 11 11 CONNECT 4800 Connection at 4800 bps 12 12 CONNECT 9600 Connection at 9600 bps 13 16 CONNECT 12000 Connection at 12 000 bps 14 13 CONNECT 14400 Connection at 14 400 bps 15 14 CONNECT 19200 Connection at 19 200 bps 16 15 CONNECT 7200 Connection at 7200 bps 17 17 CONNECT 16800 Connection at 16 800 bps 19 1 CONNECT 300 Connection at 300 bps 20 10 CONNECT 2400 EC Connection at 2400 bps with err
232. peaker Control Determines if the speaker is Off On until carrier signal is received by the modem or On all the time The factory default is OnUntilCarr NOTE Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings AT command for Off is MO AT command for On Until CD is M1 AT command for On is M2 9 42 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 8 2 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Speaker Volume Medium Nxt Medium Low High Speaker Volume Controls the level of speaker volume The factory default is Medium NOTE Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings AT command for Low is LO or L1 AT command for Medium is L2 AT command for High is L3 Access frm Remt Enable Nxt Enable Disable Access from Remote Determines if your modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line CAUTION If this configuration option is disabled the modem cannot be accessed by another modem Enable Allows access from a remote modem Disable Does not allow access from a remote modem The factory default is Enable NOTE The remote modem must be a 3800 Series modem AT command is S register S55
233. played with the result codes For a list of Extended Result Codes refer to Table B 1 in Appendix B Enable Result codes include NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER and CONNECT xxxx where xxxx is the VF data rate Disable Only OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER and ERROR result codes appear NOTE NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled BUSY appears if Busy Detect configuration option is enabled Add EC Places the EC suffix after the result code text if error control is used For example CONNECT 9600 EC Add V 42 MNP Places either the V 42 or MNP suffix after the result code text if data compression is used For example CONNECT 9600 V42b Use DTE Rate Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate This feature is required in some modem pooling applications The factory default is Enable AT command to disable is X0 AT commands to enable are X1 X2 X3 or X4 AT command for Add EC is X5 AT command for Add V42 MNP is X6 AT command for Use DTE Rate is X7 This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 17 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 2 4 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options ResultCode Form Words Nxt Words Numbers 1 Numbers 2 Result Codes Format Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes Some DTEs
234. pment from the network until the problem is resolved 7 The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 D COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems 8 10 Canada This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such a message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of such business or other entity or individual In order to program this information follow the steps outlined in the manual supplied with your fax software An FCC compliant telephone cord with modular plugs may be provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant Notice to Users of the Canadian Public Switched Telephone Network The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies
235. power output level over leased lines Enter a value from 0 to 15 dBm Factory setting is 0 dBm Configure Edit eased Line S46 Bad Lines Auto Originate Register determines if the modem performs an automatic dial backup if the leased lines fail Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 30 seconds 2 20 seconds 3 60 seconds 4 90 seconds 5 120 seconds 21 600 seconds Factory setting is Disable Note that the S46 2 command has an effect that is out of sequence with the other values Configure Edit Leased Line 14 20 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 6 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S47 Auto Dial Standby Register determines if the modem performs an automatic dial standby if in Dial Backup mode Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 15 minutes 2 1 hour 3 4 hours 255 Test 2min Factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Leased Line S48 Leased Line Carrier On Level Register determines if the modem disconnects if the carrier signal on leased lines falls below 26 dBm or 43 dBm Register has the following values 43 dBm 12 26 dBm Factory setting is 43 dBm Configure Edit Leased Line S49 Transmit Buffer Disconnect Delay Determines the maximum amount of time the modem can continue to send data in its Transmit Buffer to th
236. r integral DCP 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 33 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems V 42 MNP Buffer Table 9 6 shows each V 42 MNP Buffer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options determine the factory default setting the default value if the modem is type of error correction and flow control used by the just being installed shown following the colon on the modems and attached DTEs first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected If the Async Sync Mode configuration option is set for synchronous operation see DTE Interface configuration options group then the V 42 MNP Buffer group does not appear on the LCD Any changes made to configuration options within this group only take effect after a disconnect Table 9 6 1 of 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Err Contr Mode V42 MNPorBfr Nxt V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr MNP or Disc Buffer ModeDirectMode LAPM or Disc LAPM or Buffr Determines the type of error control used by the modem In most cases V42 MNPorBfr is the best choice If V 42bis and MNP are enabled then the modem uses the following priority for error
237. re it is ready to receive an incoming call For example an ATA Answer command has been issued to place the modem into online answer mode The modem has been forced off hook and is generating an answer tone beginning the handshaking process with the calling modem This code American Standard Code for Information Interchange is a 7 bit code which establishes compatibility between data services ASCII is the standard for data transmission over telephone lines The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in asynchronous dial networks A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a character five to eight bits and one or more stop bits at the end A group of commands issued from an asynchronous DTE that allow control of the modem while in Command mode All commands must begin with the characters AT and end with a carriage return A prefix issued before every AT command except A and which identifies the DTE s data rate parity and character length Modem automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate when using AT commands A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Glossary 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems automatic dial backup automatic dial standby backbone network ba
238. ress and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block Modem dials but does not connect If the modem is operating behind a PBX verify if a 9 and comma are needed before the telephone number Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed Verify if one modem is configured for Error Control or Disconnect and the other modem is configured for no Error Control Try calling in Buffer mode If both modems use V 32bis or V 32 modulation set the modem s V 32bis Train configuration option to Long Intermittent disconnects high error rates or excessive retransmissions Perform an End to End test Refer to the Pattern section of Chapter 8 Test Branch Modem establishes and disconnects a call You may have a poor VF connection Disconnect and dial again The remote modem may have encountered an EC Disconnect where the modem is configured to establish a call using error correction If the modems cannot negotiate EC then a disconnect occurs The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode disconnect if there is no error control Reconfigure your modem to V 42 MNP or Buffer and try again Check the LCD to verify the reason for disconnect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test High error rates occur when running a local loopback or self test Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test Abort the test disconnect the modular VF cord
239. returned from the remote modem For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode To access Rem Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A Rem_Digital_Loop G3 SOB Press the key until Rem Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test DTE DTE VERIFIES SENDS MESSAGE s i TRANSMITTER ue Test Remote Loop A Started ness je lJ l2 5 The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED Model 3810 and Model 3811 lights for the duration of the test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Tests section in Chapter 9 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the lt key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Remote Loopback is amp T6 RECEIVER DTE INTERFACE TRANSMITTER TEST MESSAGE LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM Figure 8 2 Remote Digital Loopback 8 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Test Branch Loc Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and forces it to loopback any data received from the remote modem Figure 8 3 This te
240. rform this test otherwise Invalid Command appears To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A T A Press the key until Loc Analog Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Local Loop A j Started A The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED Model 3810 and Model 3811 lights for the duration of the test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Tests section in Chapter 9 A Ring Indicate during this test can cause errors To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the lt key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Local Analog Loopback is amp T1 SENDS TEST MESSAGE DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE LOCAL MODEM 491 13076 Figure 8 1 Local Analog Loopback 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 8 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Rem Digital Loop Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 2 Figure 8 2 This test can verify the integrity of the local modem the communications link and the remote modem Any data or pattern entered at the local DTE is sent to and
241. riage return character Enter key e Commands with the suffix n have several options associated with them For example in the Ln command L1 sets the speaker volume to Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High If no value 1s entered for the n suffix the modem assumes a zero 0 value e The A command without pressing the Enter key causes the modem to repeat the last command entered e Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or word result codes unless the result codes have been disabled using the Q1 command See Appendix B for a list of result codes with numeric and word equivalents AT Command List AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE such as a PC and control the modem s operation and software configuration AT commands are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT See amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 14 1 lists all AT commands supported by the 3800 Series modem The first column lists the AT command The second column defines and lists all possible values for that command The Async Dial factory default is listed in bold The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent front panel command Use this to reference commands in Chapters 5 through 12 if further description is necessary 14 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers AT Command Format In Table 14 1 the value for X is listed in the AT Command
242. rmine the maximum RENs for the calling area If the 3800 Series modem causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service 6 If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact your sales or service representative as appropriate for repair or warranty information If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equi
243. s Sync Leased Answer Originate Cellular Mobile Cellular PSTN 494 13079 02 9 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Active Saved ATZO ATZ3 Customer 1 Customer 2 Fact ATZ1 ATZ2 Seu NOTE ON POWER UP Active Saved IS LOADED TO Active Operating e Async Dial UNIX Dial AT amp FO AT amp F3 e Sync Dial Sync Leased AT amp F1 Originate e Sync AT amp F4 Leased Cellular Answer Mobile AT amp F5 LOAD Active Operating AT amp F2 Cellular USING ATZ OR AT amp F PSTN AT amp F6 COMMAND Active Operating CHANGES MADE USING ANY AT COMMAND IMMEDIATELY AFFECT MODEM OPERATION USE AT amp W COMMAND TO SAVE CHANGES TO Active Saved Customer 1 OR Customer 2 Active Saved AT amp WO NOTE THE AT amp W COMMAND IS DISABLED IF THE Straps When Disconnect CONFIGURATION OPTION IS SET TO RELOAD Customer 1 Customer 2 AT amp W1 AT amp W2 494 13080 02 Figure 9 2 AT Command Configuration Process 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Configure Branch The Configure branch of the Top Level menu contains all of the modem s configuration options straps which determine how the modem operates These configuration options are accessed by scrolling down and across various levels of the Configure branch Call_Setup Tik Data Ld EditArea frm
244. s only valid for Model 3811 modems Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable S41 Dial Line Rate Configure Edit Dial Line Register determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Register has the following values 4400 V 32bis 12 000 V 32bis 9600 V 32bis V 32 7200 V 32bis 4800 V 32bis V 32 2400 V 22bis 1200 V 22 1200 212A 0 300 V21 0 300 103d 19 200 V 32terbo 16 800 V 32terbo Factory setting is 19 200 V 32terbo 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 19 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 5 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S43 V 32bis Train Register controls the modem s train time for V 32bis V 32 mode Register has the following values 0 Long 1 Short Factory setting is Long Configure Edit Dial Line S44 Leased Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on either 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines in either Answer or Originate mode Register has the following values 0 1 14 400 V 32bis 12 000 V 32bis 9600 V 32bis 7200 V 32bis 4800 V 32bis 2400 V 22bis 18 19 200 V 32terbo 19 16 800 V 32terbo Factory setting is 19 200 V 32terbo oOoRW PD Configure Edit Leased Line S45 Leased TX Level Register determines the modem s transmit
245. s Off when the carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold Forced On Forces LSD to be ON at all times Wink When Disconnect LSD is normally forced ON but can be turned Off for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect This is used for UNIX DTEs Follows DTR The state of LSD follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON LSD turns ON When DTR turns Off LSD turns Off Simulated Control Carrier LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V 13 simulated control carrier signaling This is required for hosts that cannot support full duplex operation NOTE If LSD Control is set for simulated control carrier then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set for Simulated Control Carrier zDTR Disconnect Off The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is established In this instance DTR remains ON and LSD turns Off DTR must then toggle Off and then ON again for LSD to turn ON This setting is required for AT amp T DATAKIT dial out applications BridgeRetrain LSD behaves as if it were set for Standard RS232 except that it is turned off when a retrain condition lasts longer than10 seconds and turned on again when no retrain condition is detected for a period of 10 seconds NOTE If LSD Control is set for ZDTR DiscOff then the DTR Action configuration option must be set for Stndrd RS232 For Async Dial Sync Dial and Sync Leased Stndrd RS
246. s key sequence until the dial command modifiers and telephone number are entered Refer to Table 5 1 for a list of valid dial command modifiers 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 5 5 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems AT Command Equivalent 01 9W5556789 CA E t a A The AT command for Change Directory is amp Zn x where n is the directory location and x is the telephone fa fe lel es m number Table 5 1 describes what can be entered in directory locations To save the number just entered scroll to the next directory location by selecting Nxt or press the f or key The number is now stored in nonvolatile memory Table 5 1 Valid Dial Command Modifiers Dial Command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how when and what number to dial The following is a list of parameters the 3800 Series Modems recognize T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 A B C or D can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option see Line Dialer
247. s or the DCP A jack used for leased line networks Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8 are the receive pair A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP s LCD These keys are used to select configuration options and to maneuver through the DCP Liquid Crystal Display A thin sandwich of two sealed glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that messages may be written on the display A private line connection exclusively for the user No dialing is necessary Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator on the DCP that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g Alrm The modem s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver A disconnect can occur if the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem for example when a remote modem is commanded to disconnect it transmits a continuous space to the modem before disconnecting Any test that verifies a device s integrity by connecting the device s output of one direction to the device s input of the other direction then checking the received signal for errors Line Signal Detect A signal between the DTE and modem indicating energy exists on the transmission circuit The structure containing the 3800 Series menu hierarchy starting at a Top Level menu and extending down to various modem functions This protocol Microcom N
248. s the 10 alphanumeric character Originate Access password T is the Tone DTMF dial modifier Comma is a pause dial parameter 98005551234 is the phone number Database Table Examples The following examples illustrate possible database tables in which the password type is configured for VF Entry DTE Entry or a combination of VF DTE and VF plus DTE Entry These tables are shown for illustrative purposes only Passwords shown are not representative of good password selections NOTE The Assigned to column is not stored in the modem Table 12 4 is an example of a database table with passwords configured for VF Entry only This type of password is entered within the AT command dial string Table 12 4 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords VF Password Only Index Password Type dus 21 1 VF Entry Denver office 31 12 VF Entry Chicago office 41 1212 VF Entry Dallas office 51 953246 VF Entry Miami office modem 1 52 46958373 VF Entry Miami office modem 2 61 32562682 VF Entry Atlanta office 12 12 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security Table 12 5 is an example of a database table with Table 12 6 is an example of a security database table passwords configured for DTE Entry only This type of that uses a mixture of VF and DTE passwords password is entered via the originating user s DTE
249. shown following the colon on the first calls line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option a description of the available selections and any equivalent AT commands Table 9 3 1 of 6 Line Dialer Configuration Options AutoAnswerRing 1 Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 Auto Answer Ring Count Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming call For example if this option is set for 2 then the answering modem answers after the second ring NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 1 2 4 6 8 or 10 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 rings Disable If selected the modem must be answered using either the DCP s Answer command or Tlk Data function or via AT commands The factory default is 1 AT command to disable is SO 0 AT command is S register SO n where nis a ring count from 1 to 255 Dialer Type Tone Nxt Tone Pulse Dialer Type Selects either tone DTMF dialing or pulse rotary dialing mode The factory default is Tone AT command for tone dialing is T AT command for pulse dialing is P DialTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Dial Tone Detect Sets the modem for dial tone detection enable or blind dialing disable Enable Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both the LCD and
250. ss MOVES UP HIDDEN ONE LEVEL LCD CHOICE RETURNS FROM CURRENT TOP INDICATORS DISPLAY TO DISPLAY LINE TOP LEVEL MENU Idle 19 2 Call Setup FUNCTION KEYS RIGHT SCROLL KEY LCD BOTTOM LINE Figure 4 4 3800 Series LCD and Keypad LCD Display The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line with each displaying a maximum of 16 characters at a time If additional information appears on the LCD than what is currently displayed a hidden choice indicator appears in the upper right hand corner of the LCD Use the lt 1 or key to scroll in the indicated direction to display more selections onto the LCD Hidden Choice Indicators The Hidden Choice Indicators serve as an alert that other selections are available besides what is currently displayed on the LCD These indicators appear as one of the following symbols Right Scroll Indicator gt The right scroll indicator displays when more choices are available to the right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Right Scroll Indicator The left right scroll indicator displays when more choices are available to the left and right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Scroll Indicator lt The left scroll indicator displays when more choices are available to the left of what is currently displayed on the LCD The LCD does not wrap around to the first choice once you have reached the end of choices Remote Mode Indicator If
251. ssword to a configuration area make the following selections RemAccssPasswrd A E 112345678 A a te elie Press the A key to scroll up twice Choose Function A Edit Save GR m L 8 W we Select Save Sav EditArea to gt Zs Active Saved A Gc E99 2 5 Select a configuration area Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 to save the changes Select the key to exit to the Top Level menu or select the A key to remain in the Configure branch Summary When using the DCP to edit configuration options keep the following in mind e Nxt has two functions First it indicates that more configuration options are available within that group These are accessed by selecting Nxt pressing F1 and scrolling down to the next configuration option Second it indicates that what is displayed on the LCD is the current setting If you scroll left or right Nxt disappears and reappears if a new value is selected e End appears when you have scrolled down to the last configuration option available in that group Selecting End returns you to the top of the configuration group You are free to enter that group again or scroll left or right to the next configuration options group e The A key takes you one step up in the Configure branch each time it is pressed e The x key causes you to exit the Configure branch and return to the Top Level menu If
252. st be configured to the same Advanced setting The Test 2min selections are for testing this feature only The factory default is Disable AT command is S register S47 n S47 0 Disable S47 1 15min S47 22 thr S47 23 4hrs S47 4 Test 2min 84725 Advanced 15min S47 6 Advanced 1hr S47 7 Advanced 4hrs S47 8 Advanced Test 2min CarrierOn Level 43dbm Nxt 43dbm 26dbm Carrier On Level This configuration option controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines When the power level of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this level either 26 dBm or 43 dBm LSD turns Off When the carrier signal is greater than this level LSD turns ON The factory default is 43dbm AT command is S register S48 n where nis 0 for 43 dBm or 1 for 26 dBm FallFwdDelay Disable End Disable 5 mins 15 mins 1 hour Fall Forward Delay Provides an initial delay before leased or dial lines are monitored for fall forward conditions After the timer expires monitoring occurs as usual Possible delay times are 5 minutes 15 minutes or 1 hour The factory default is Disable no delay NOTE Fall Forward Delay appears under both the Dial Line configuration options and the Leased Line configuration options but the same setting is used for both Changing it in one place effectively changes it in the other There is no analogous AT command so this configuration option is not available for modems without a shared o
253. st operates the same as a CCITT V 54 Loop 2 except it is issued at your modem This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating a remote digital loopback from its location For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode To access Loc Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections qu Test A Loc_Digital_Loop eG Press the key until Loc Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Digit Loop CS ness ERBEN The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED Model 3810 and Model 3811 lights If the message Invalid Command appears on the LCD then another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and then select Loc Digital Loop If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the LCD If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Tests section in Chapter 9 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent The AT command for Local Digital Loopback is amp T3 DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE LOCAL MODEM 491 13078 Figure 8 3 Local Digital Loopback 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 8 5
254. sword The factory default is 20 seconds VF_Prompt_Type 2nd_DialTone Nxt 2nd_DialTone Quiet_Answer VF Prompt Type Determines how the answering modem requests a valid password from the originating modem for the valid password This configuration option is only used for VF side password entry and is not valid for DTE side password entry NOTE This configuration option only appears if the Answer Security Mode configuration option is configured for VF amp DTE 2nd Dial Tone Once the answering modem is off hook it generates a dial tone to the originating modem as a prompt for that modem s VF side password Second dial tone is represented by a W in the dial command string Quiet Answer Once the answering modem is off hook it does not send an answer tone to the originating modem The originating modem enters its VF side password after detecting a ring back signal followed by five seconds of silence For this to work correctly the Auto Answer Ring configuration option in the answering modem must be set to 2 rings or greater Quiet answer is represented by an in the dial command string The factory default is 2nd DialTone tDTE PW Tries 1 Nxt 12 3 4 5 Number of DTE Password Tries Determines the number of attempts an originating user has to enter a valid DTE side password If the password entered does not match a value in the answering modem s Password Table then the modem will issue the password prompt again prov
255. t Command A 14 3 replacing modems 2 8 3 4 Reset 10 2 Reset and Load Active Z 14 6 Reset Security 12 10 Result Codes Enable Disable 9 17 enable disable 14 5 extended 14 6 format 14 6 list B 1 Result Codes Format 9 18 rings before answer 14 16 RS366A status 7 4 RTS Action 9 11 14 10 RTS CTS Delay 9 12 9 13 RTS CTS Delay S26 14 17 S registers 14 15 change 14 5 display 14 5 format 14 15 SO Auto Answer Ring Number 9 20 14 16 S2 AT Escape Character 9 16 14 16 S3 Carriage Return Character 9 16 14 16 S4 Line Feed Character 9 17 14 16 S5 Backspace Character 9 17 14 16 S6 Blind Dial Pause 9 21 14 16 S7 No Answer Timeout 9 21 14 16 S8 Pause Time 9 21 14 17 S10 No Carrier Disconnect 9 23 14 17 S12 Escape Guard Time 9 16 14 17 S18 Test Timeout 9 40 14 17 26 RTS CTS Delay 9 12 14 17 34 1800 Hz Training Tone 14 17 S35 Auto Redial Leased Line 9 32 14 18 36 Rate Auto Originate 9 32 14 18 S37 Auto Redial DTR 9 24 14 18 38 DTR Cont Repeat 9 19 14 19 39 Receive Buffer Disconnect Delay 9 39 14 19 S40 Auto Make Busy 9 24 14 19 S41 Dial Line Rate 9 26 14 19 S43 V 32bis Train 9 28 14 20 S44 Leased Line Rate 9 29 14 20 S45 Leased Line Transmit Level 9 30 14 20 S46 Bad Lines Auto Originate 9 31 14 20 47 Auto Dial Standby 9 33 14 21 S48 Leased Line Carrier On Level 9 33 14 21 49 Transmit Buffer Disconnect
256. t the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface 3 If the Model 3810 has a dial backup line follow the steps listed in Model 3810 Dial Line Connection section Model 3820 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Use the following procedures to connect a Model 3820 modem to the 6 pin center pair leased line network interface For 2 wire leased line connection to a JM8 network interface refer to Figure E 1 in Appendix E 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL LEASED 3820 Figure 2 3 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface Model 3810 and Model 3820 Telephone Connection Use the following procedures to connect the modem to a telephone 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled PHONE LEASED 3810 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the telephone Dial Network Management System Connection For Model 3810 and 3820 modems use the following procedures to connect the modem to the network management system interface 1 Insert the subminiature 4 conductor modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device into the jack labeled NMS Figure 2 2 or 2 3 2 Connect the 3600 Hubbing Device to the network management system Refer to the 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F 3 300 Installation Instructions 3610 A2 GZ45 for more information Installation for the Model 3810 and 3820 mod
257. tached computer The equipment Data Terminal Equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals A temporary work area used to view and change configuration options from the DCP without impacting modem operation The edit area can be loaded from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry An Electronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment An Electronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications automatic calling equipment Erasable programmable read only memory An algorithm used to correct data transmission errors Default setting is This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to Command mode An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that includes VF data rate and error control information the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command A modem capable of emulating some features of a fax machine Working under the control of fax software a fax modem can communicate with a fax machine or with another fax modem A program or system of programs installed on a computer that allow a fax
258. ted and then interrupted the remote modem is left in a partially programmed state in which its functional capabilities are limited to those required to initiate and complete another download attempt Warning Download A Abort_Download CAS le L2 L5 10 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Control Branch At this point if you do not want to continue this process abort the transfer by selecting any function key This returns the modem to the Top Level menu However to continue with the transfer press the gt key to display the Reprogram Remote selection Warning Download Xs ESL A a a fre r Press any function key to begin the transfer RemClone Status A Establish Remote Gm Ln 8 L8 we The local modem s LCD displays Establish Remote indicating the modem is attempting to establish a Remote Cloning Download session with the remote modem If unsuccessful the modem remains in the Download Transfer mode The LCD s top line displays RemClone Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following messages The modems are connected but are using a modulation scheme other than V 33 V 32bis V 32 or V 29 The remote modem is not a 3800 Series modem or the connection between the two modems is poor Incompat Modulat No Response Access The remote modem s Access Disabled from Remote configuration
259. ted in V 32bis mode Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable 2 Start at 4800 bps 3 Start at 9600 bps Factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Dial Line S77 DTR Alarm Reporting Register determines whether an alarm is sent to the 6800 Series Network Management System controller when the DTR signal has been off for more than 10 seconds Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure YEditMisc S78 V 32bis Automode Dial Line Register allows the modem when operating on dial lines to automatically detect and connect to the remote modem s modulation scheme If the modem is in a modem pool attached to a System 85 Private Branch Exchange PBX S78 should be set to 2 This modifies parameters used during connection to the PBX Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable 2 System 85 Factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Dial Line 14 24 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 10 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S80 No Data Disconnect Trigger Signal Register determines whether Pin 2 transmit data or Pin 3 receive data of the modem s RS 232 serial interface is monitored so that the modem can disconnect the call if there is no activity for a certain period See the T command Register has
260. tem COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS Register has the following values 0 Call Connect amp Progress 1 Disable 2 Call Connect Only 3 Call Progress Only Factory setting is Call Connect amp Progress S67 Directory Location 1 Callback Configure Edit Misc Register determines if the modem uses the single number callback function Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 23 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 2 9 of 11 3800 Series S Registers S Register Description Front Panel Branch S69 Make Busy Via DTR Register determines if the modem goes off hook busy when DTR is Off Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory setting is Disable Configure WEditLine Dialer S74 Network Position Identification Register identifies each modem as either a control or tributary modem Register has the following values 0 Tributary 1 Control Factory setting is Tributary Configure Edit Misc 75 Network Management Address Register determines the modem s network address This address is used when accessing the modem from the NMS Enter a value from 0 network address 001 to 255 network address 256 Factory setting is 255 Configure Edit Dial S76 V 32bis Autorate Dial Line Register determines if Autorating is used on dial lines when connec
261. tes if the command was accepted by the modem Call Response includes Call Failure Indication CFI and Call Connecting CNX Call Failure Indication CFI The CFI response is issued to the DTE if the modem fails a CRN or CRS command CFI is similar to the AT result codes BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE and ERROR The CFI response format is CFIxx Where xx is ET Engaged tone NS Number not stored CB Local DCE busy RT Timeout on ring tone AB Abort call on time out NT Answer tone not detected FC Forbidden call ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages Busy Signal and Trunk Busy and the result code BUSY NS is similar to the Common Operational Message Invalid Number and the result code ERROR CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages Dial Line in Use and No Dial Test and the result code ERROR RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer Tone and the result code NO CARRIER AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages No Dial Tone and No Dial DTR and the result code NO DIALTONE and ERROR NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet Answer and the result code NO ANSWER Call Connecting CNX The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem has connected to the remote modem CNX is similar to the AT result code CONNECT The CNX response format is CNX F 2 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response Call Answer Commands Call Answer commands
262. the local 3800 Series modem establishes a connection with the remote 3800 Series modem via the Remote branch then appears in place of the hidden choice indicator on both modems Keypad The DCP on the Model 3810 and Model 3820 has seven keys while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has eight keys The additional key on the carrier is the Select key used to connect the SDCP to a specific slot in the carrier A Key The X key returns you to the Top Level menu display from anywhere in the menu tree Pressing A while changing configuration options displays the message Save Straps Yes No If No is selected changes made to configuration options are not saved and the Top Level menu appears If Yes is selected then changes are saved to either Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas 4 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation A Key Talk Data The Z key moves you up one level in the menu tree lt and gt Keys Use the lt 1 and keys to move the viewing window left or right and to scroll the remaining branches and selections into view A maximum of three selections can be displayed at one time These keys also allow you to move the cursor one character to the left or right on data entry displays for example to allow entry of one digit at a time F1 F2 F3 Keys Function keys select the LCD choice that appears above the function key they ar
263. tion Bell 103J protocol is used for data rates of 0 300 bps Disable Connection fails if the remote modem does not support the selected modulation System 85 Modifies parameters used by the connection process Specify System 85 only if your modem is in a modem pool attached to a System 85 Private Branch Exchange PBX The factory default is Enable AT command is S register S78 n where nis 0 for Enable 1 for Disable or 2 for System 85 9 26 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 4 2 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96 Enable Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 14 400 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis connections Disable Line rate does not vary StartAt48 StartAt96 Useful for lines with known noise problems these settings cause the modem to connect at 4 800 bps StartAt48 or 9 600 bps StartAt96 If line conditions warrant it the modem shifts up to the next higher rate until 14 400 bps or the highest possible rate for the line is reached The factory default is Enable AT command for V 32bis Autorate is S register S76 n where nis 0 for Enable 1 for Disable 2 for StartAt48 and 3 for StartAt9
264. tions themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number for this equipment is listed on the label on the modem The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100 If your equipment is in need of repair refer to the procedures described on page A in the front of this document for contact information 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 F Table of Contents Objectives and Reader Assumptions seei ceii reniris retencne ni oei How to Use This Manual 255e16 j 9L regor eri bees be bee Related Documents 1 Introduction Overview Beatles E E E eth bed te de bed E EE diee COPUIONS ocer e a an COMSPHERE 3800 Series Models 0 0 cece nenn 2 Model 3810 and 3820 Installation B cass ereus errik eaer Eeee ae Ene ea eani eene ranea 3800 Series Modem Package surciceciod ecri ex rer Rd Model 3810 or Model 3820 Modem Installation DTE Connection Model 3820 Dial Line Connection 2 0 0 2 eee ee eee Model 3810 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Model 3820 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Lus
265. to load the appropriate factory configuration to the appropriate storage area Enter the following TYPE AT amp Fy amp Wn Where yis one of the following Factory configurations 0 for Async Dial 1 for Sync Dial 2 for Sync Leased Answer 3 for UNIX Dial 4 for Sync Leased Originate 5 for Cellular Mobile 6 for Cellular PSTN NOTE amp F1 amp F2 and amp F4 remove AT command control The only way to return to AT command control is through the DCP as described earlier in Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP and Where nis one of the following storage areas 0 for Active Saved 1 for Customer 1 2 for Customer 2 NOTE These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas PRESS Return Enter 2 The selected factory configuration is saved The amp V View command can be used to display the configuration options in effect The output of the amp V command can be saved to a file and printed using your communications software providing both a record of your configuration and a worksheet for configuration enhancements Refer to Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers for more on AT commands 4 14 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 DCP Operation Di
266. tree branches are described in Chapters 5 through 12 Functions that appear on the LCD vary depending upon the type of model installed its operating mode and software configuration Call Setup Used to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls as well as store up to 10 telephone numbers in directory locations See Chapter 5 494 13083 02 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 4 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins The LCD s top line identifies the modem status as listed in Table 4 4 while the bottom line displays the main menu tree branches and operational and dial access security messages as listed in Table 4 5 and Table 4 6 at the Top Level menu the head of the menu hierarchy Table 4 4 1 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Normal Operation Status Message Indicates Fax Rx MR Indicates that the modem is online in fax receive modem operating at the displayed data rate Fax Tx MR Indicates that the modem is online in fax transmit mode operating at the displayed data rate Idle MR The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on hook Leased MR The modem is operating on leased lines at the displayed data rate OnLine MR EC Indicates the modem is online in Data mode and operating at the displayed data rate EC error control displays if error control is operat
267. ty and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode or Buffer mode must be 10 bits or less The total character size for Direct mode must be 11 bits or less AT prefix determines the async character length This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async 9 8 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 1 2 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options Parity Bit None Nxt None Even Odd Mark Space Parity Bit Determines type of parity bit The parity of the DTE must match the parity of the modem Parity options include None Even Odd Mark or Space None No parity bit is used This is the default for Async mode Even Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is even Odd Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is odd This is the default for Sync mode Mark Parity bit is always set to 1 Only valid if Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 Space Parity bit is always set to 0 Only valid if Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 The factory default is None NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits see DTE Dialer configuration options group Total character size consists of a start bit number of data bits parity bits and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data
268. udes any calls being used for dial backup of leased lines The Command Complete status message is displayed To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the lt key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the x key AT Command Equivalent The AT command equivalent for Disconnect is H or HO Answer Answer allows the modem to go off hook generate an answer tone and begin the handshaking process with the calling modem Use the Answer function when the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is disabled See the Line Dialer section in Chapter 9 NOTE When the Model 3820 is configured for leased line operation this function is not available and is not displayed on the LCD To access Answer from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup a Answer Sues O lej lej Cm Press the key until Answer is displayed Select Answer Answer A Command Complete A 5 L2 amp The modem goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection in Answer mode The Command Complete status message appears on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key AT Command Equivalent The AT command equivalent for Answer is A 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 5 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Dial Standby R
269. umber 1 aN Modem O K Gm Gc J e L5 amp The LCD displays the first sequence fault field Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are identified by a number in the upper right corner Press the key to view the remaining fields The message Modem O K appears if no sequence faults have occurred To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD and nonvolatile memory select Clear The message Modem O K appears To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the X key AT Command Equivalent There is no AT command for Record 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 7 5 OVEIVIEW aceiri Peek dei e ew a eee iba e Test BEAD sens vatican sci ee tret deque tet pese ADDE xs scd rcc tacto e icy ntc ed cec Bel iio dackaes Gea cpi nU Ove a E dram gs Loc Analog LOOD 2l RR Re xe Rem Dipital LOOP 4 22 o2 eerte edes Loc Digital Eoo s sdadscadenste neniet juicy TEUER Overview The Test branch of the Top Level menu allows you to initiate various modem tests Use these tests if you are having data communication problems such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors By the process of elimination you can usually isolate the fault in your system Test Branch There are six selections under Test Abort Self Self Test Loc Analog Loop Local Analog Loopback Rem Digital Loop Remote Digital Loop
270. unction with the B CCITT Bell Mode command to determine modulation B19200 V 32terbo maximum rate 19 200 bps B16800 V 32terbo maximum rate 16 800 bps B14400 V 32bis maximum rate 14 400 bps B12000 V 32bis maximum rate 12 000 bps B9600 V 32bis V 32 maximum rate 9600 bps B7200 V 32bis maximum rate 7200 bps B4800 V 32bis V 32 maximum rate 4800 bps B2400 V 22bis maximum rate 2400 bps B1200 V 22 or Bell 212A maximum rate 1200 bps B300 V 21 or Bell 103 maximum rate 300 bps 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 14 13 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 14 1 12 of 12 3800 Series AT Commands e Front Panel Command Description Branch S Bn cont d Modulation and Data Rate can also be set using S register S41 The following table shows the equivalent values of S41 for each Bn value and where applicable Bn in combination with Bn 41 20 B19200 V 32terbo 19 200 bps S41 21 B16800 V 32terbo 16 800 bps S41 1 B14400 V 32bis 14 400 bps 41 2 B12000 V 32bis 12 000 bps 41 3 B9600 V 32bis V 32 9600 bps 841 24 B7200 V 32bis 7200 bps 41 5 B4800 V 32bis V 32 4800 bps S41 6 B2400 V 22bis 2400 bps 841 27 B1200 B0 V 22 1200 bps S41 8 B1200 B1 Bell 212A 1200 bps 41 10 B300 B0 V 21 300 bps S41 11 B300 B1 Bell 103J 300 bps The factory default is B19200 Cn MNP5 Data Compression Configure Edit 96CO Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable Rn DTE Rate Configure
271. uration Opuons ccce tee emeret eder eae aes 9 40 9 8 Miscellaneous Configuration Options 2 0 00 ee eee ee eee eee 9 42 9 9 Security Configuration Opuons ele bee meh eee 9 46 12 1 Edit Password Table Group Options 4 0 4 0 0 mmm ee 12 7 12 2 Set Answer Security Group Options lesse eere 12 8 12 3 Set Originate Security Group Options 0 6 0 ee eee ee ternie wee ee 12 9 12 4 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords 00005 12 12 12 5 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords 002 12 13 12 6 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side and DTE Side Passwords 12 13 12 7 Security Database Table Using Paired VF Side and DTE Side Passwords 12 14 14 1 3800 Senes AT Commands robbrerbetieir etere Beet ay ee Cee D 14 3 14 2 380000H8S S REZSI el Ph die ca be E deed nae Ge aa cee eee obi bene 14 16 B l Result Codes oo ccc en ker keneren tnd AG based Sale ee kee oe Body be ases B 1 C l Modem Health uses ebur ad ae baie dooce See Seeds Roe eles C 1 C 2 Modem DIE Connection 00566556 sspe IRR Rad eee RUE noes E ak C 2 C 3 Modem VF Connection icis cse Ree een ea th bee Ee ERU ees Daun C 2 C A Online Operation csuses nete Rer kb Gace E uh t keia y Paese ed fune C 4 C5 Leased Line Operations orc kw enews REP NOR RE ERE sane ie REPE RSS C 4 C 6 Dial Backup Operation corong det KST REB e Rr Rmo RR ERG P ER EEEERES C 4 D 1 Technical Specifications
272. urations The 3800 Series modems have several factory preset templates that contain the most commonly used configuration options straps for Asynchronous Dial Synchronous Dial Synchronous Leased Answer or Originate UNIX hardware network cellular mobile and cellular PSTN configurations Your modem is shipped from the factory with the Async Dial default configuration options stored in memory If Sync Dial Sync Leased UNIX Dial or Cellular is more appropriate for your configuration then you must change the factory setting using either the modem s DCP or the AT command set as described in the following sections The preset configuration gives you a head start in getting your modem operating and reduces the amount of time required to configure your modem For a better understanding of DCP operation and factory preset configuration options refer to Chapter 9 Configure Branch Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP The DCP s liquid crystal display LCD consists of two 16 character lines which display modem status control functions and configuration options as well as indicating your location in the Top Level menu tree Appendix A To change the factory template using the DCP perform the following steps 1 On the DCP press the key until Configure comes into view 2 Press the function key below Configure to select the Configure branch The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm 3 Press the key until Fa
273. ust change the Dial Transmit Level configuration option using either the DCP refer to the Dial Line configuration options in Chapter 9 Configure Branch or the AT amp J command refer to Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers Model 3810 Dial Line Connection For the Model 3810 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the dial network interface Programmable mode 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL LEASED 3820 Figure 2 2 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface Permissive mode 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL LEASED 3820 Figure 2 2 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface Model 3820 Dial Line Connection Use the following procedures to connect a Model 3820 to the dial network interface Permissive mode 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL LEASED 3820 Figure 2 3 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface 2 6 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Model 3810 and 3820 Installation Model 3810 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Use the following procedures to connect a Model 3810 to the leased line network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled PHONE LEASED 3810 Figure 2 2 2 Inser
274. vate line networks specifically the service equivalents of the pre divestiture Series 3002 Category II Tariff 260 service There is a substantial difference in transmit levels permitted in the private line service and those permitted in 8 POSITION PLUG PIN NO YELLOW RED the public switched network The industry standard is now an 8 pin keyed modular jack known as the USOC JM amp Bellcore Technical Reference TR EOP 000242 Issue 1 released May 1985 When ordering the installation of the USOC JMS specify the appropriate wiring options 1 2 wire operations 2 4 wire operations w o TEK leads 3 4 wire operations with TEK leads TEK leads are for loopback purposes A 50 pin version is being considered for multiple line connections Insert the 6 position plug into the LEASED jack of your modem Insert the 8 position plug into the leased line network interface 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO YELLOW 491 13138 Figure E 1 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable E 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Pin Assignments Table E 3 VF Connector Pin Assignments Models 3810 and 3820 Pin picis 3810 TA a posh 3820 Dial Leased Connector 1 4 Wire Transmit Leased Line 2 Wire Leased Line 2 4 Wire Transmit Leased Line 2 Wire Leased Line 3 Mode Indication Mode Indication 4 Phone Ring Dial Ring Phone
275. verview The COMSPHERE 3800 Series modems a new generation of full feature high speed dial modems offer reliable asynchronous and synchronous operation over dial or leased lines networks The 3800 Series modems unique software defineability allows for the addition of future enhancements whether it is installing new features or firmware upgrades Through its downloading capability any 3800 Series modem can be upgraded to the latest firmware requiring no new hardware investment or on site personnel and little or no downtime These modems support a wide range of modulation schemes and offer control using either AT commands the user friendly diagnostic control panel DCP or the optional COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System NMS The NMS performs extensive monitoring testing reporting and restoral functions to assist in managing your network High speed data transfer and reliable throughput at data rates as high as 19 200 bps V 32terbo over dial lines is guaranteed by employing the latest techniques in CCITT V 42bis MNP Class 5 data compression and CCITT V 42 MNP error correction In addition to fast line speeds the modem can send data to the DTE at speeds as high as 115 200 bps Introduction TM E 1 2 EIRA EENE SEEE ENE ETE E 1 2 kac hagati oed Heda he o hes EE E ee ES 1 2 The 3800 Series modem is extremely versatile when used in modem pooling environments it allows multiple users to temporarily customize s
276. ves DTR from the DTE it sends DSR to the DTE On Early DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data mode This setting is required for some modem pooling applications 9 10 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Configure Branch Table 9 1 4 of 7 DTE Interface Configuration Options DSR Control cont d Delay to Data Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 setting except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters Data mode Normally the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR to CTS delay common for V 32bis modulation or when dial access security is enabled and requires a DTE side password entry Often the DTE cannot accept the long delay between DSR and CTS turning ON due to the remote user entering the DTE side password Dial Backup Toggle DSR is turned off during a dial backup attempt in Leased mode and on when such an attempt completes DSR is also turned off when a disconnect begins and turned on when the disconnect is complete For Async Dial and UNIX Dial Forced On is the factory default For Sync Dial and Sync Leased Stndrd RS232 is the factory default AT command for Forced On is amp SO AT command for Standard RS232 is amp S1 AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp S2 AT command for Follows DTR is amp S3 AT command for On Early is amp S4
277. w The standalone Model 3810 modem Figure 2 1 is capable of either dial or 4 wire 2 wire leased line operation The modem is controlled using either AT commands or the diagnostic control panel DCP The DCP consists of an LCD which displays the Top Level menu three function keys and four directional keys which allow you to maneuver and choose DCP selections and a row of 12 LED status indicators which display modem activity For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 4 DCP Operation The rear of the modem contains an ON Off power switch a low voltage ac power connector an 8 pin modular connector for phone or leased line connection an 8 pin modular connector for dial line connection a 4 pin modular connector for network management and a DB 25 S DTE connector The standalone Model 3820 is capable of dial and 2 wire leased line operation Its DCP functions are similar to the Model 3810 except it has only six LED status indicators For more information regarding the DCP refer to Chapter 4 DCP Operation The rear of the modem contains an ON Off power switch a low voltage ac power connector an 8 pin modular connector for external telephone use an 8 pin modular connector for dial line or 2 wire leased line connection a 4 pin modular connector for network management and a DB 25 S DTE connector 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 2 1 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL PANEL
278. w the VF Prompt Type option is configured The originating modem detects this response and transmits its password which corresponds to a preselected series of DTMF tones Note that VF passwords can be from 1 to 8 digits in length only decimal digits are permitted The answering modem verifies the password against its own password database and if valid continues with the normal training sequence VF side password works with any autodialer that supports second dial tone or quiet answer and can be implemented in one of three ways First the VF password can be embedded within the AT command dial string Second a phone number and password can be entered via the diagnostic control panel DCP This is the preferred method for synchronous applications And finally an attached telephone can be used to manually generate DTMF tones for the phone number and password After the answering modem accepts the password and generates an answerback tone the originating caller places the modem in Data mode and hangs up the phone The following examples illustrate two ways to enter a VF side password TYPE ATDP5551234TW 12345678 or ATDT5551234 12345678 PRESS Enter Where ATD is the AT dial command P and T are the Pulse dial and Tone DTMF dial modifiers 5551234 is the phone number W or is the VF Prompt Tone option setting for second dial tone or quiet answer 12345678 is the VF side password is the password termination
279. wering modem Although this also appears under the Security Configuration Option group in Chapter 9 it can only be changed from the Set Answer Table 12 2 describes the settings of the Set Answer Sec LCD display in the Security branch Security group option Select Set_Answer_Sec Table 12 2 Set Answer Security Group Options Set Answer Sec No Answ Sec DTE Only VF amp DTE VF w DTE Set Answer Security Is the primary method for enabling or disabling the dial access security function No Answer Security Disables the dial access security feature DTE Only The answering modem is enabled for security The originating user must supply a password when prompted Note that a call attempt never enters data mode if the answering modem is configured for DTE Only and the originating caller attempts to enter a password using only the VF side password entry technique NOTE In modem pooling applications where modems are connected to a multiline hunt group rotary all modems must have this configuration option set to the same value VF amp DTE The answering modem is enabled for security The modems negotiate security using the VF side password entry technique protocol If successful and the Password Type for this particular VF password is set for VF amp DTE a password is requested from the originating user If successful the modems connect and can pass data NOTE A call attempt fails if the answering modem is configured for VF
280. word entry prior to training If successful the modems connect and then prompt the originating user for a valid password If correctly entered the modems connect 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 12 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Security Branch The Security branch of the Top Level menu allows you to change and save parameters that are critical to the dial access security password database This database is a collection of passwords and their associated parameters that determine how the modems control password access Call_Setup Tik Data Most of the functions within this branch are protected by an Administrative Password Once the correct password is entered these security functions appear on the modem s LCD The two major functions that appear under the Security branch are Set Access Control and Reset Security Security Set Access Ctrl Reset Security Admin Password EditPassWdTable Set Answer Sec I I Set Orig Secur Set Admin PsWd 494 13089a 01 12 4 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security Set Access Ctrl Set Access Control allows you to change security configuration This function is protected by an Administrative Password The Reset Security function allows you to reset the Administrative Password but results in erasure of the modem s security database To access Security from the Top Level menu make the following selections Idle 19 2 A Co
281. xample V 29 V 33 and dial network management If no firmware options are installed None_Installed appears on the LCD To access Options from the Status branch make the following sections Status A ERR s A Press the key until Options appears Select Options Options Status gt A V 29 V 33 A o 9 8 es If optional features are installed in the modem they appear on the LCD s bottom line If other features are installed press the gt key to scroll other features into view Record Record is a troubleshooting tool used by the end user in conjunction with support personnel This function allows the end user to retrieve and report any sequence faults to support personnel A sequence fault is an irregular or unexpected event There are two selections under Record Display and Clear Display allows up to eight sequence fault messages that have been recorded by the modem to be displayed on the LCD If no sequence faults have occurred then Modem O K appears Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages from nonvolatile memory and the LCD To access Record from the Status branch make the following selections Status A Options les c L8 L8 ee Press the gt key until Record appears Select Record Record Status A Display Clear GS c FJ 2 5 To display sequence faults select Display Record N
282. xt Disable 550Hz 1800Hz V 22bis Guard Tone Determines whether the V 22bis guard tone is disabled set to 550 Hz or set to 1800 Hz Disable No guard tone 550 Hz or 1800 Hz When the modem is in Answer mode it transmits the guard tone at this frequency The factory default is Disable AT command to disable is amp GO AT command for 550 Hz is amp G1 AT command for 1800 Hz is amp G2 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 9 27 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems Table 9 4 3 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V32bis Train Long Nxt Long Short V 32bis Train Controls V 32bis and V 32 train Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used during the V 32bis V 32 handshaking sequence for both dial and 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications NOTE This configuration option only appears when the Dial Line Rate configuration option is set for Auto 148 3 or any fixed V 32bis data rate Long Selects long train Use this setting whenever far end frequency offset phase roll may be encountered This is usually only required when transmitting over satellite links Short Allows the modem to train up faster when using V 32bis V 32 modulation The factory default is Long AT command is S register S43 n where n is 0 for Long and 1 for Short FallFwdDelay Disable End Disable 5 mins 15 mins 1 hour Fall Forward Delay Provides an initial delay before leased or dial lines are monitored for fall forward
283. y appears Select Reset Security Reset Security gt A Abort_Sec_Reset A je le 59g 5 To abort this function select Abort_Sec_Reset Nothing is erased and the LCD returns to the main security display This value appears as a single number on the last page of this document 12 10 November 1996 3810 A2 GB30 20 Security Reset Security ZN EE i A lt ri re rs gt To reset security press until Erase_All_PassWd appears on the LCD Select Erase_All_PassWd The entire security database is erased and the Administrative Password defaults to the Reset Default password value This value appears as a single number on the last page of this document Security Password Entry Techniques The previous sections described how to set up and configure your network for dial access security Once configured and enabled you must now supply a password to originate or answer a call The following examples demonstrate how to enter an Answer Access security password string and an Originate Access password string Note that dial access security messages that may appear on the LCD are listed in Table 4 6 in Chapter 4 Answer Access Password VF Side and DTE Side Entry Techniques Answer Access password security uses two password entry techniques VF side password and DTE side password entry A VF side password consists of DTMF tones and is entered by the origi
284. y by counting the number of bits that have a value of one Telephone switching equipment Private Branch Exchange dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of 9 dBm It is one of two possible modes of operation for modems connected to dial lines see programmable interface The diagnostic address of a control modem derived from its location in the carrier its carrier and slot number A test that checks most hardware components when the modem is powered on A three digit code indicating the modem s highest VF data rate A dial modem operating mode characterized by an output power level 12 to 0 dBm set by a programming resistor in the jack It is one of two possible modes of operation for modems connected to dial lines see permissive interface The rules for timing format error control and flow control during data transmission Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known as dial network One of two dialing methods in which telephone numbers are sent as pulses brief changes in voltage or current intensity across the telephone line Rotary telephones use pulse dialing 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Glossary 7 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems register Remote remote loopba
285. ync 14 10 Hidden Choice Indicators 4 6 Hook Switch Control H 14 4 Identity 7 3 installation carrier mount 3 2 standalone 2 3 keypad 4 6 3810 A2 GB30 20 November 1996 Index 3 COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems LCD display 4 6 LdEditAreafrm 9 5 Leased Line Carrier On Level S48 14 21 Leased Line mode 14 9 Leased Line Rate 9 29 14 20 Leased Line Transmit Level 9 30 Leased Mode 9 29 O Leased TX Level S45 14 20 leased line connection 2 7 LEDs 4 4 Line Current Disconnect 9 22 Line Current Disconnect S65 14 23 Line Dialer 9 20 Line Feed Character S4 14 16 Linefeed Character 9 17 Local Analog Loop 8 3 Local Digital Loop 8 5 locking the DCP 4 15 P Long Space Disconnect 9 22 Long Space Disconnect Y 14 6 LSD Control amp C 14 7 Make Busy 10 3 Make Busy Via DTR 9 24 Make Busy Via DTR S69 14 24 manual dialing 6 2 Maximum Frame Size 9 39 menu tree A 1 overview 4 7 remote 11 3 messages 4 8 MI MIC Dialing 9 25 MI MIC Dialing S83 14 25 MNPS5 Compression 9 35 MNPS Compression C 14 14 models 1 2 carrier mounted 3 1 standalone 2 1 Modem to Modem Flow Control 9 37 Modulation and Data Rate B 14 13 modulations supported D 2 Network Management Address 9 44 Network Management Address S75 14 24 Network Position 9 45 Network Position Identification S74 14 24 NMS DTR alarm 9 44 NMS Call Messages 9 44 NMS Call Messages S66 14

Paradyne COMSPHERE 3800 Series Modems 3810 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents